mirror/tracy
1
0
Fork 0
mirror of https://github.com/wolfpld/tracy.git synced 2024-11-10 02:31:48 +00:00
Code Issues Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

Bump ImGui to 1.90 + docking.

Browse Source
This commit is contained in:
Bartosz Taudul 2023-11-15 18:47:54 +01:00
parent aa5cc655a9
commit cf1e91b853
No known key found for this signature in database
GPG Key ID: B7FE2008B7575DF3
15 changed files with 2362 additions and 1061 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

4
imgui/imconfig.h
View File

@ -28,13 +28,13 @@
//---- Don't define obsolete functions/enums/behaviors. Consider enabling from time to time after updating to clean your code of obsolete function/names.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO // 1.87: disable legacy io.KeyMap[]+io.KeysDown[] in favor io.AddKeyEvent(). This will be folded into IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS in a few versions.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO // 1.87+ disable legacy io.KeyMap[]+io.KeysDown[] in favor io.AddKeyEvent(). This is automatically done by IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS.
//---- Disable all of Dear ImGui or don't implement standard windows/tools.
// It is very strongly recommended to NOT disable the demo windows and debug tool during development. They are extremely useful in day to day work. Please read comments in imgui_demo.cpp.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE // Disable everything: all headers and source files will be empty.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS // Disable demo windows: ShowDemoWindow()/ShowStyleEditor() will be empty.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS // Disable metrics/debugger and other debug tools: ShowMetricsWindow(), ShowDebugLogWindow() and ShowStackToolWindow() will be empty (this was called IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW before 1.88).
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS // Disable metrics/debugger and other debug tools: ShowMetricsWindow(), ShowDebugLogWindow() and ShowIDStackToolWindow() will be empty.
//---- Don't implement some functions to reduce linkage requirements.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS // [Win32] Don't implement default clipboard handler. Won't use and link with OpenClipboard/GetClipboardData/CloseClipboard etc. (user32.lib/.a, kernel32.lib/.a)

1221
imgui/imgui.cpp
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

301
imgui/imgui.h
View File

@ -1,32 +1,30 @@
// dear imgui, v1.89.9
// dear imgui, v1.90.0
// (headers)
// Help:
// - Read FAQ at http://dearimgui.com/faq
// - Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' in imgui.cpp for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase.
// - See links below.
// - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp. All applications in examples/ are doing that.
// Read imgui.cpp for details, links and comments.
// - Read top of imgui.cpp for more details, links and comments.
// Resources:
// - FAQ http://dearimgui.com/faq
// - FAQ https://dearimgui.com/faq
// - Getting Started https://dearimgui.com/getting-started
// - Homepage https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
// - Releases & changelog https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases
// - Gallery https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/6478 (please post your screenshots/video there!)
// - Gallery https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/6897 (please post your screenshots/video there!)
// - Wiki https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki (lots of good stuff there)
// - Getting Started https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started
// - Glossary https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary
// - Issues & support https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues
// - Tests & Automation https://github.com/ocornut/imgui_test_engine
// Getting Started?
// - Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started
// - For first-time users having issues compiling/linking/running/loading fonts:
// please post in https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/discussions if you cannot find a solution in resources above.
// For first-time users having issues compiling/linking/running/loading fonts:
// please post in https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/discussions if you cannot find a solution in resources above.
// Everything else should be asked in 'Issues'! We are building a database of cross-linked knowledge there.
// Library Version
// (Integer encoded as XYYZZ for use in #if preprocessor conditionals, e.g. '#if IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 12345')
#define IMGUI_VERSION "1.89.9"
#define IMGUI_VERSION_NUM 18990
#define IMGUI_VERSION "1.90.0"
#define IMGUI_VERSION_NUM 19000
#define IMGUI_HAS_TABLE
#define IMGUI_HAS_VIEWPORT // Viewport WIP branch
#define IMGUI_HAS_DOCK // Docking WIP branch
@ -54,7 +52,7 @@ Index of this file:
#pragma once
// Configuration file with compile-time options
// (edit imconfig.h or '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "myfilename.h" from your build system')
// (edit imconfig.h or '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "myfilename.h" from your build system)
#ifdef IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
#include IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
#endif
@ -74,7 +72,7 @@ Index of this file:
// Define attributes of all API symbols declarations (e.g. for DLL under Windows)
// IMGUI_API is used for core imgui functions, IMGUI_IMPL_API is used for the default backends files (imgui_impl_xxx.h)
// Using dear imgui via a shared library is not recommended, because we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility (also function call overhead, as dear imgui is a call-heavy API)
// Using dear imgui via a shared library is not recommended: we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility + this is a call-heavy library and function call overhead adds up.
#ifndef IMGUI_API
#define IMGUI_API
#endif
@ -89,7 +87,6 @@ Index of this file:
#endif
#define IM_ARRAYSIZE(_ARR) ((int)(sizeof(_ARR) / sizeof(*(_ARR)))) // Size of a static C-style array. Don't use on pointers!
#define IM_UNUSED(_VAR) ((void)(_VAR)) // Used to silence "unused variable warnings". Often useful as asserts may be stripped out from final builds.
#define IM_OFFSETOF(_TYPE,_MEMBER) offsetof(_TYPE, _MEMBER) // Offset of _MEMBER within _TYPE. Standardized as offsetof() in C++11
#define IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(IMGUI_VERSION, sizeof(ImGuiIO), sizeof(ImGuiStyle), sizeof(ImVec2), sizeof(ImVec4), sizeof(ImDrawVert), sizeof(ImDrawIdx))
// Helper Macros - IM_FMTARGS, IM_FMTLIST: Apply printf-style warnings to our formatting functions.
@ -198,6 +195,7 @@ typedef int ImDrawListFlags; // -> enum ImDrawListFlags_ // Flags: f
typedef int ImFontAtlasFlags; // -> enum ImFontAtlasFlags_ // Flags: for ImFontAtlas build
typedef int ImGuiBackendFlags; // -> enum ImGuiBackendFlags_ // Flags: for io.BackendFlags
typedef int ImGuiButtonFlags; // -> enum ImGuiButtonFlags_ // Flags: for InvisibleButton()
typedef int ImGuiChildFlags; // -> enum ImGuiChildFlags_ // Flags: for BeginChild()
typedef int ImGuiColorEditFlags; // -> enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ // Flags: for ColorEdit4(), ColorPicker4() etc.
typedef int ImGuiConfigFlags; // -> enum ImGuiConfigFlags_ // Flags: for io.ConfigFlags
typedef int ImGuiComboFlags; // -> enum ImGuiComboFlags_ // Flags: for BeginCombo()
@ -246,8 +244,8 @@ typedef unsigned long long ImU64; // 64-bit unsigned integer
// Character types
// (we generally use UTF-8 encoded string in the API. This is storage specifically for a decoded character used for keyboard input and display)
typedef unsigned short ImWchar16; // A single decoded U16 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
typedef unsigned int ImWchar32; // A single decoded U32 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
typedef unsigned short ImWchar16; // A single decoded U16 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32 // ImWchar [configurable type: override in imconfig.h with '#define IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32' to support Unicode planes 1-16]
typedef ImWchar32 ImWchar;
#else
@ -315,7 +313,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Demo window. demonstrate most ImGui features. call this to learn about the library! try to make it always available in your application!
IMGUI_API void ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Metrics/Debugger window. display Dear ImGui internals: windows, draw commands, various internal state, etc.
IMGUI_API void ShowDebugLogWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Debug Log window. display a simplified log of important dear imgui events.
IMGUI_API void ShowStackToolWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Stack Tool window. hover items with mouse to query information about the source of their unique ID.
IMGUI_API void ShowIDStackToolWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Stack Tool window. hover items with mouse to query information about the source of their unique ID.
IMGUI_API void ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create About window. display Dear ImGui version, credits and build/system information.
IMGUI_API void ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref = NULL); // add style editor block (not a window). you can pass in a reference ImGuiStyle structure to compare to, revert to and save to (else it uses the default style)
IMGUI_API bool ShowStyleSelector(const char* label); // add style selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the default styles.
@ -336,23 +334,33 @@ namespace ImGui
// Some information such as 'flags' or 'p_open' will only be considered by the first call to Begin().
// - Begin() return false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting
// anything to the window. Always call a matching End() for each Begin() call, regardless of its return value!
// [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu,
// BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function
// returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
// [Important: due to legacy reason, Begin/End and BeginChild/EndChild are inconsistent with all other functions
// such as BeginMenu/EndMenu, BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding
// BeginXXX function returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
// - Note that the bottom of window stack always contains a window called "Debug".
IMGUI_API bool Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API void End();
// Child Windows
// - Use child windows to begin into a self-contained independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window. Child windows can embed their own child.
// - For each independent axis of 'size': ==0.0f: use remaining host window size / >0.0f: fixed size / <0.0f: use remaining window size minus abs(size) / Each axis can use a different mode, e.g. ImVec2(0,400).
// - BeginChild() returns false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting anything to the window.
// Always call a matching EndChild() for each BeginChild() call, regardless of its return value.
// [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu,
// BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function
// returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
// - Before 1.90 (November 2023), the "ImGuiChildFlags child_flags = 0" parameter was "bool border = false".
// This API is backward compatible with old code, as we guarantee that ImGuiChildFlags_Border == true.
// Consider updating your old call sites:
// BeginChild("Name", size, false) -> Begin("Name", size, 0); or Begin("Name", size, ImGuiChildFlags_None);
// BeginChild("Name", size, true) -> Begin("Name", size, ImGuiChildFlags_Border);
// - Manual sizing (each axis can use a different setting e.g. ImVec2(0.0f, 400.0f)):
// == 0.0f: use remaining parent window size for this axis.
// > 0.0f: use specified size for this axis.
// < 0.0f: right/bottom-align to specified distance from available content boundaries.
// - Specifying ImGuiChildFlags_AutoResizeX or ImGuiChildFlags_AutoResizeY makes the sizing automatic based on child contents.
// Combining both ImGuiChildFlags_AutoResizeX _and_ ImGuiChildFlags_AutoResizeY defeats purpose of a scrolling region and is NOT recommended.
// - BeginChild() returns false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting
// anything to the window. Always call a matching EndChild() for each BeginChild() call, regardless of its return value.
// [Important: due to legacy reason, Begin/End and BeginChild/EndChild are inconsistent with all other functions
// such as BeginMenu/EndMenu, BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding
// BeginXXX function returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiChildFlags child_flags = 0, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiChildFlags child_flags = 0, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = 0);
IMGUI_API void EndChild();
// Windows Utilities
@ -360,11 +368,11 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowAppearing();
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowCollapsed();
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags=0); // is current window focused? or its root/child, depending on flags. see flags for options.
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags=0); // is current window hovered (and typically: not blocked by a popup/modal)? see flags for options. NB: If you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to imgui or to your app, you should use the 'io.WantCaptureMouse' boolean for that! Please read the FAQ!
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags=0); // is current window hovered and hoverable (e.g. not blocked by a popup/modal)? See ImGuiHoveredFlags_ for options. IMPORTANT: If you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to Dear ImGui or to your underlying app, you should not use this function! Use the 'io.WantCaptureMouse' boolean for that! Refer to FAQ entry "How can I tell whether to dispatch mouse/keyboard to Dear ImGui or my application?" for details.
IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetWindowDrawList(); // get draw list associated to the current window, to append your own drawing primitives
IMGUI_API float GetWindowDpiScale(); // get DPI scale currently associated to the current window's viewport.
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowPos(); // get current window position in screen space (note: it is unlikely you need to use this. Consider using current layout pos instead, GetScreenCursorPos())
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowSize(); // get current window size (note: it is unlikely you need to use this. Consider using GetScreenCursorPos() and e.g. GetContentRegionAvail() instead)
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowPos(); // get current window position in screen space (note: it is unlikely you need to use this. Consider using current layout pos instead, GetCursorScreenPos())
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowSize(); // get current window size (note: it is unlikely you need to use this. Consider using GetCursorScreenPos() and e.g. GetContentRegionAvail() instead)
IMGUI_API float GetWindowWidth(); // get current window width (shortcut for GetWindowSize().x)
IMGUI_API float GetWindowHeight(); // get current window height (shortcut for GetWindowSize().y)
IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport*GetWindowViewport(); // get viewport currently associated to the current window.
@ -373,7 +381,7 @@ namespace ImGui
// - Prefer using SetNextXXX functions (before Begin) rather that SetXXX functions (after Begin).
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0, const ImVec2& pivot = ImVec2(0, 0)); // set next window position. call before Begin(). use pivot=(0.5f,0.5f) to center on given point, etc.
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window size. set axis to 0.0f to force an auto-fit on this axis. call before Begin()
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGuiSizeCallback custom_callback = NULL, void* custom_callback_data = NULL); // set next window size limits. use -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size. Sizes will be rounded down. Use callback to apply non-trivial programmatic constraints.
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGuiSizeCallback custom_callback = NULL, void* custom_callback_data = NULL); // set next window size limits. use 0.0f or FLT_MAX if you don't want limits. Use -1 for both min and max of same axis to preserve current size (which itself is a constraint). Use callback to apply non-trivial programmatic constraints.
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size); // set next window content size (~ scrollable client area, which enforce the range of scrollbars). Not including window decorations (title bar, menu bar, etc.) nor WindowPadding. set an axis to 0.0f to leave it automatic. call before Begin()
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window collapsed state. call before Begin()
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowFocus(); // set next window to be focused / top-most. call before Begin()
@ -444,13 +452,25 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(ImU32 col); // retrieve given color with style alpha applied, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
IMGUI_API const ImVec4& GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx); // retrieve style color as stored in ImGuiStyle structure. use to feed back into PushStyleColor(), otherwise use GetColorU32() to get style color with style alpha baked in.
// Cursor / Layout
// Layout cursor positioning
// - By "cursor" we mean the current output position.
// - The typical widget behavior is to output themselves at the current cursor position, then move the cursor one line down.
// - You can call SameLine() between widgets to undo the last carriage return and output at the right of the preceding widget.
// - Attention! We currently have inconsistencies between window-local and absolute positions we will aim to fix with future API:
// Window-local coordinates: SameLine(), GetCursorPos(), SetCursorPos(), GetCursorStartPos(), GetContentRegionMax(), GetWindowContentRegion*(), PushTextWrapPos()
// Absolute coordinate: GetCursorScreenPos(), SetCursorScreenPos(), all ImDrawList:: functions.
// - Absolute coordinate: GetCursorScreenPos(), SetCursorScreenPos(), all ImDrawList:: functions. -> this is the preferred way forward.
// - Window-local coordinates: SameLine(), GetCursorPos(), SetCursorPos(), GetCursorStartPos(), GetContentRegionMax(), GetWindowContentRegion*(), PushTextWrapPos()
// - GetCursorScreenPos() = GetCursorPos() + GetWindowPos(). GetWindowPos() is almost only ever useful to convert from window-local to absolute coordinates.
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorScreenPos(); // cursor position in absolute coordinates (prefer using this, also more useful to work with ImDrawList API).
IMGUI_API void SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& pos); // cursor position in absolute coordinates
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorPos(); // [window-local] cursor position in window coordinates (relative to window position)
IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosX(); // [window-local] "
IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosY(); // [window-local] "
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos); // [window-local] "
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosX(float local_x); // [window-local] "
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosY(float local_y); // [window-local] "
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorStartPos(); // [window-local] initial cursor position, in window coordinates
// Other layout functions
IMGUI_API void Separator(); // separator, generally horizontal. inside a menu bar or in horizontal layout mode, this becomes a vertical separator.
IMGUI_API void SameLine(float offset_from_start_x=0.0f, float spacing=-1.0f); // call between widgets or groups to layout them horizontally. X position given in window coordinates.
IMGUI_API void NewLine(); // undo a SameLine() or force a new line when in a horizontal-layout context.
@ -460,15 +480,6 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void Unindent(float indent_w = 0.0f); // move content position back to the left, by indent_w, or style.IndentSpacing if indent_w <= 0
IMGUI_API void BeginGroup(); // lock horizontal starting position
IMGUI_API void EndGroup(); // unlock horizontal starting position + capture the whole group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorPos(); // cursor position in window coordinates (relative to window position)
IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosX(); // (some functions are using window-relative coordinates, such as: GetCursorPos, GetCursorStartPos, GetContentRegionMax, GetWindowContentRegion* etc.
IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosY(); // other functions such as GetCursorScreenPos or everything in ImDrawList::
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos); // are using the main, absolute coordinate system.
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosX(float local_x); // GetWindowPos() + GetCursorPos() == GetCursorScreenPos() etc.)
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosY(float local_y); //
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorStartPos(); // initial cursor position in window coordinates
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorScreenPos(); // cursor position in absolute coordinates (useful to work with ImDrawList API). generally top-left == GetMainViewport()->Pos == (0,0) in single viewport mode, and bottom-right == GetMainViewport()->Pos+Size == io.DisplaySize in single-viewport mode.
IMGUI_API void SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& pos); // cursor position in absolute coordinates
IMGUI_API void AlignTextToFramePadding(); // vertically align upcoming text baseline to FramePadding.y so that it will align properly to regularly framed items (call if you have text on a line before a framed item)
IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeight(); // ~ FontSize
IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing(); // ~ FontSize + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of text)
@ -515,7 +526,7 @@ namespace ImGui
// - Most widgets return true when the value has been changed or when pressed/selected
// - You may also use one of the many IsItemXXX functions (e.g. IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.) to query widget state.
IMGUI_API bool Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // button
IMGUI_API bool SmallButton(const char* label); // button with FramePadding=(0,0) to easily embed within text
IMGUI_API bool SmallButton(const char* label); // button with (FramePadding.y == 0) to easily embed within text
IMGUI_API bool InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0); // flexible button behavior without the visuals, frequently useful to build custom behaviors using the public api (along with IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.)
IMGUI_API bool ArrowButton(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir); // square button with an arrow shape
IMGUI_API bool Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v);
@ -528,8 +539,9 @@ namespace ImGui
// Widgets: Images
// - Read about ImTextureID here: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Image-Loading-and-Displaying-Examples
// - Note that ImageButton() adds style.FramePadding*2.0f to provided size. This is in order to facilitate fitting an image in a button.
IMGUI_API void Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1, 1), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1, 1, 1, 1), const ImVec4& border_col = ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
IMGUI_API bool ImageButton(const char* str_id, ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1, 1), const ImVec4& bg_col = ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1, 1, 1, 1));
IMGUI_API bool ImageButton(const char* str_id, ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& image_size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1, 1), const ImVec4& bg_col = ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1, 1, 1, 1));
// Widgets: Combo Box (Dropdown)
// - The BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() items.
@ -538,7 +550,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void EndCombo(); // only call EndCombo() if BeginCombo() returns true!
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1); // Separate items with \0 within a string, end item-list with \0\0. e.g. "One\0Two\0Three\0"
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool(*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* (*getter)(void* user_data, int idx), void* user_data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
// Widgets: Drag Sliders
// - CTRL+Click on any drag box to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped by default and can go off-bounds. Use ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp to always clamp.
@ -641,22 +653,22 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API bool Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // "bool* p_selected" point to the selection state (read-write), as a convenient helper.
// Widgets: List Boxes
// - This is essentially a thin wrapper to using BeginChild/EndChild with some stylistic changes.
// - The BeginListBox()/EndListBox() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() or any items.
// - This is essentially a thin wrapper to using BeginChild/EndChild with the ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle flag for stylistic changes + displaying a label.
// - You can submit contents and manage your selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() or any other items.
// - The simplified/old ListBox() api are helpers over BeginListBox()/EndListBox() which are kept available for convenience purpose. This is analoguous to how Combos are created.
// - Choose frame width: size.x > 0.0f: custom / size.x < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: right-align / size.x = 0.0f (default): use current ItemWidth
// - Choose frame height: size.y > 0.0f: custom / size.y < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: bottom-align / size.y = 0.0f (default): arbitrary default height which can fit ~7 items
IMGUI_API bool BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // open a framed scrolling region
IMGUI_API void EndListBox(); // only call EndListBox() if BeginListBox() returned true!
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* (*getter)(void* user_data, int idx), void* user_data, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
// Widgets: Data Plotting
// - Consider using ImPlot (https://github.com/epezent/implot) which is much better!
IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float));
IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float));
IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
// Widgets: Value() Helpers.
// - Those are merely shortcut to calling Text() with a format string. Output single value in "name: value" format (tip: freely declare more in your code to handle your types. you can add functions to the ImGui namespace)
@ -688,9 +700,9 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
// Tooltips: helpers for showing a tooltip when hovering an item
// - BeginItemTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip) && BeginTooltip())' idiom.
// - SetItemTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip)) { SetTooltip(...); }' idiom.
// - Where 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip' itself is a shortcut to use 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav' depending on active input type. For mouse it defaults to 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort'.
// - BeginItemTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) && BeginTooltip())' idiom.
// - SetItemTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip)) { SetTooltip(...); }' idiom.
// - Where 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip' itself is a shortcut to use 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav' depending on active input type. For mouse it defaults to 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort'.
IMGUI_API bool BeginItemTooltip(); // begin/append a tooltip window if preceding item was hovered.
IMGUI_API void SetItemTooltip(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // set a text-only tooltip if preceeding item was hovered. override any previous call to SetTooltip().
IMGUI_API void SetItemTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
@ -778,8 +790,9 @@ namespace ImGui
// - Use TableSetupScrollFreeze() to lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled.
IMGUI_API void TableSetupColumn(const char* label, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = 0, float init_width_or_weight = 0.0f, ImGuiID user_id = 0);
IMGUI_API void TableSetupScrollFreeze(int cols, int rows); // lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled.
IMGUI_API void TableHeadersRow(); // submit all headers cells based on data provided to TableSetupColumn() + submit context menu
IMGUI_API void TableHeader(const char* label); // submit one header cell manually (rarely used)
IMGUI_API void TableHeadersRow(); // submit a row with headers cells based on data provided to TableSetupColumn() + submit context menu
IMGUI_API void TableAngledHeadersRow(); // submit a row with angled headers for every column with the ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader flag. MUST BE FIRST ROW.
// Tables: Sorting & Miscellaneous functions
// - Sorting: call TableGetSortSpecs() to retrieve latest sort specs for the table. NULL when not sorting.
@ -819,9 +832,9 @@ namespace ImGui
// Docking
// [BETA API] Enable with io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable.
// Note: You can use most Docking facilities without calling any API. You DO NOT need to call DockSpace() to use Docking!
// - Drag from window title bar or their tab to dock/undock. Hold SHIFT to disable docking/undocking.
// - Drag from window title bar or their tab to dock/undock. Hold SHIFT to disable docking.
// - Drag from window menu button (upper-left button) to undock an entire node (all windows).
// - When io.ConfigDockingWithShift == true, you instead need to hold SHIFT to _enable_ docking/undocking.
// - When io.ConfigDockingWithShift == true, you instead need to hold SHIFT to enable docking.
// About dockspaces:
// - Use DockSpaceOverViewport() to create an explicit dock node covering the screen or a specific viewport.
// This is often used with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode to make it transparent.
@ -857,7 +870,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropTarget(); // call after submitting an item that may receive a payload. If this returns true, you can call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget()
IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // accept contents of a given type. If ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery is set you can peek into the payload before the mouse button is released.
IMGUI_API void EndDragDropTarget(); // only call EndDragDropTarget() if BeginDragDropTarget() returns true!
IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* GetDragDropPayload(); // peek directly into the current payload from anywhere. may return NULL. use ImGuiPayload::IsDataType() to test for the payload type.
IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* GetDragDropPayload(); // peek directly into the current payload from anywhere. returns NULL when drag and drop is finished or inactive. use ImGuiPayload::IsDataType() to test for the payload type.
// Disabling [BETA API]
// - Disable all user interactions and dim items visuals (applying style.DisabledAlpha over current colors)
@ -921,8 +934,6 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API const char* GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx); // get a string corresponding to the enum value (for display, saving, etc.).
IMGUI_API void SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage* storage); // replace current window storage with our own (if you want to manipulate it yourself, typically clear subsection of it)
IMGUI_API ImGuiStorage* GetStateStorage();
IMGUI_API bool BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame
IMGUI_API void EndChildFrame(); // always call EndChildFrame() regardless of BeginChildFrame() return values (which indicates a collapsed/clipped window)
// Text Utilities
IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, bool hide_text_after_double_hash = false, float wrap_width = -1.0f);
@ -941,6 +952,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey key); // is key being held.
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat = true); // was key pressed (went from !Down to Down)? if repeat=true, uses io.KeyRepeatDelay / KeyRepeatRate
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey key); // was key released (went from Down to !Down)?
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyChordPressed(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord); // was key chord (mods + key) pressed, e.g. you can pass 'ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiKey_S' as a key-chord. This doesn't do any routing or focus check, please consider using Shortcut() function instead.
IMGUI_API int GetKeyPressedAmount(ImGuiKey key, float repeat_delay, float rate); // uses provided repeat rate/delay. return a count, most often 0 or 1 but might be >1 if RepeatRate is small enough that DeltaTime > RepeatRate
IMGUI_API const char* GetKeyName(ImGuiKey key); // [DEBUG] returns English name of the key. Those names a provided for debugging purpose and are not meant to be saved persistently not compared.
IMGUI_API void SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(bool want_capture_keyboard); // Override io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag next frame (said flag is left for your application to handle, typically when true it instructs your app to ignore inputs). e.g. force capture keyboard when your widget is being hovered. This is equivalent to setting "io.WantCaptureKeyboard = want_capture_keyboard"; after the next NewFrame() call.
@ -1030,12 +1042,10 @@ enum ImGuiWindowFlags_
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus = 1 << 13, // Disable bringing window to front when taking focus (e.g. clicking on it or programmatically giving it focus)
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar= 1 << 14, // Always show vertical scrollbar (even if ContentSize.y < Size.y)
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar=1<< 15, // Always show horizontal scrollbar (even if ContentSize.x < Size.x)
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding = 1 << 16, // Ensure child windows without border uses style.WindowPadding (ignored by default for non-bordered child windows, because more convenient)
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs = 1 << 18, // No gamepad/keyboard navigation within the window
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus = 1 << 19, // No focusing toward this window with gamepad/keyboard navigation (e.g. skipped by CTRL+TAB)
ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument = 1 << 20, // Display a dot next to the title. When used in a tab/docking context, tab is selected when clicking the X + closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar.
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking = 1 << 21, // Disable docking of this window
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs = 1 << 16, // No gamepad/keyboard navigation within the window
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus = 1 << 17, // No focusing toward this window with gamepad/keyboard navigation (e.g. skipped by CTRL+TAB)
ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument = 1 << 18, // Display a dot next to the title. When used in a tab/docking context, tab is selected when clicking the X + closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar.
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking = 1 << 19, // Disable docking of this window
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse,
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
@ -1048,6 +1058,33 @@ enum ImGuiWindowFlags_
ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal = 1 << 27, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginPopupModal()
ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu = 1 << 28, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginMenu()
ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost = 1 << 29, // Don't use! For internal use by Begin()/NewFrame()
// Obsolete names
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding = 1 << 30, // Obsoleted in 1.90: Use ImGuiChildFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding in BeginChild() call.
#endif
};
// Flags for ImGui::BeginChild()
// (Legacy: bot 0 must always correspond to ImGuiChildFlags_Border to be backward compatible with old API using 'bool border = false'.
// About using AutoResizeX/AutoResizeY flags:
// - May be combined with SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() to set a min/max size for each axis (see "Demo->Child->Auto-resize with Constraints").
// - Size measurement for a given axis is only performed when the child window is within visible boundaries, or is just appearing.
// - This allows BeginChild() to return false when not within boundaries (e.g. when scrolling), which is more optimal. BUT it won't update its auto-size while clipped.
// While not perfect, it is a better default behavior as the always-on performance gain is more valuable than the occasional "resizing after becoming visible again" glitch.
// - You may also use ImGuiChildFlags_AlwaysAutoResize to force an update even when child window is not in view.
// HOWEVER PLEASE UNDERSTAND THAT DOING SO WILL PREVENT BeginChild() FROM EVER RETURNING FALSE, disabling benefits of coarse clipping.
enum ImGuiChildFlags_
{
ImGuiChildFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiChildFlags_Border = 1 << 0, // Show an outer border and enable WindowPadding. (Important: this is always == 1 == true for legacy reason)
ImGuiChildFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding = 1 << 1, // Pad with style.WindowPadding even if no border are drawn (no padding by default for non-bordered child windows because it makes more sense)
ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeX = 1 << 2, // Allow resize from right border (layout direction). Enable .ini saving (unless ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings passed to window flags)
ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeY = 1 << 3, // Allow resize from bottom border (layout direction). "
ImGuiChildFlags_AutoResizeX = 1 << 4, // Enable auto-resizing width. Read "IMPORTANT: Size measurement" details above.
ImGuiChildFlags_AutoResizeY = 1 << 5, // Enable auto-resizing height. Read "IMPORTANT: Size measurement" details above.
ImGuiChildFlags_AlwaysAutoResize = 1 << 6, // Combined with AutoResizeX/AutoResizeY. Always measure size even when child is hidden, always return true, always disable clipping optimization! NOT RECOMMENDED.
ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle = 1 << 7, // Style the child window like a framed item: use FrameBg, FrameRounding, FrameBorderSize, FramePadding instead of ChildBg, ChildRounding, ChildBorderSize, WindowPadding.
};
// Flags for ImGui::InputText()
@ -1098,7 +1135,8 @@ enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding = 1 << 10, // Use FramePadding (even for an unframed text node) to vertically align text baseline to regular widget height. Equivalent to calling AlignTextToFramePadding().
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth = 1 << 11, // Extend hit box to the right-most edge, even if not framed. This is not the default in order to allow adding other items on the same line. In the future we may refactor the hit system to be front-to-back, allowing natural overlaps and then this can become the default.
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth = 1 << 12, // Extend hit box to the left-most and right-most edges (bypass the indented area).
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere = 1 << 13, // (WIP) Nav: left direction may move to this TreeNode() from any of its child (items submitted between TreeNode and TreePop)
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAllColumns = 1 << 13, // Frame will span all columns of its container table (text will still fit in current column)
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere = 1 << 14, // (WIP) Nav: left direction may move to this TreeNode() from any of its child (items submitted between TreeNode and TreePop)
//ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoScrollOnOpen = 1 << 14, // FIXME: TODO: Disable automatic scroll on TreePop() if node got just open and contents is not visible
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog,
@ -1135,7 +1173,7 @@ enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_
{
ImGuiSelectableFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups = 1 << 0, // Clicking this doesn't close parent popup window
ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns = 1 << 1, // Selectable frame can span all columns (text will still fit in current column)
ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns = 1 << 1, // Frame will span all columns of its container table (text will still fit in current column)
ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick = 1 << 2, // Generate press events on double clicks too
ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled = 1 << 3, // Cannot be selected, display grayed out text
ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap = 1 << 4, // (WIP) Hit testing to allow subsequent widgets to overlap this one
@ -1156,6 +1194,7 @@ enum ImGuiComboFlags_
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest = 1 << 4, // As many fitting items as possible
ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton = 1 << 5, // Display on the preview box without the square arrow button
ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview = 1 << 6, // Display only a square arrow button
ImGuiComboFlags_WidthFitPreview = 1 << 7, // Width dynamically calculated from preview contents
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_ = ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest,
};
@ -1256,6 +1295,8 @@ enum ImGuiTableFlags_
// Sorting
ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti = 1 << 26, // Hold shift when clicking headers to sort on multiple column. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount > 1).
ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate = 1 << 27, // Allow no sorting, disable default sorting. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount == 0).
// Miscellaneous
ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn = 1 << 28, // Highlight column headers when hovered (may evolve into a fuller highlight)
// [Internal] Combinations and masks
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_ = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame,
@ -1278,12 +1319,13 @@ enum ImGuiTableColumnFlags_
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort = 1 << 9, // Disable ability to sort on this field (even if ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable is set on the table).
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending = 1 << 10, // Disable ability to sort in the ascending direction.
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending = 1 << 11, // Disable ability to sort in the descending direction.
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel = 1 << 12, // TableHeadersRow() will not submit label for this column. Convenient for some small columns. Name will still appear in context menu.
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel = 1 << 12, // TableHeadersRow() will not submit horizontal label for this column. Convenient for some small columns. Name will still appear in context menu or in angled headers.
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderWidth = 1 << 13, // Disable header text width contribution to automatic column width.
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending = 1 << 14, // Make the initial sort direction Ascending when first sorting on this column (default).
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending = 1 << 15, // Make the initial sort direction Descending when first sorting on this column.
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable = 1 << 16, // Use current Indent value when entering cell (default for column 0).
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable = 1 << 17, // Ignore current Indent value when entering cell (default for columns > 0). Indentation changes _within_ the cell will still be honored.
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader = 1 << 18, // TableHeadersRow() will submit an angled header row for this column. Note this will add an extra row.
// Output status flags, read-only via TableGetColumnFlags()
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled = 1 << 24, // Status: is enabled == not hidden by user/api (referred to as "Hide" in _DefaultHide and _NoHide) flags.
@ -1380,13 +1422,19 @@ enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_
enum ImGuiDockNodeFlags_
{
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly = 1 << 0, // Shared // Don't display the dockspace node but keep it alive. Windows docked into this dockspace node won't be undocked.
//ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCentralNode = 1 << 1, // Shared // Disable Central Node (the node which can stay empty)
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode = 1 << 2, // Shared // Disable docking inside the Central Node, which will be always kept empty.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode = 1 << 3, // Shared // Enable passthru dockspace: 1) DockSpace() will render a ImGuiCol_WindowBg background covering everything excepted the Central Node when empty. Meaning the host window should probably use SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f) prior to Begin() when using this. 2) When Central Node is empty: let inputs pass-through + won't display a DockingEmptyBg background. See demo for details.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit = 1 << 4, // Shared/Local // Disable splitting the node into smaller nodes. Useful e.g. when embedding dockspaces into a main root one (the root one may have splitting disabled to reduce confusion). Note: when turned off, existing splits will be preserved.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize = 1 << 5, // Shared/Local // Disable resizing node using the splitter/separators. Useful with programmatically setup dockspaces.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar = 1 << 6, // Shared/Local // Tab bar will automatically hide when there is a single window in the dock node.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly = 1 << 0, // // Don't display the dockspace node but keep it alive. Windows docked into this dockspace node won't be undocked.
//ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCentralNode = 1 << 1, // // Disable Central Node (the node which can stay empty)
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverCentralNode = 1 << 2, // // Disable docking over the Central Node, which will be always kept empty.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode = 1 << 3, // // Enable passthru dockspace: 1) DockSpace() will render a ImGuiCol_WindowBg background covering everything excepted the Central Node when empty. Meaning the host window should probably use SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f) prior to Begin() when using this. 2) When Central Node is empty: let inputs pass-through + won't display a DockingEmptyBg background. See demo for details.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplit = 1 << 4, // // Disable other windows/nodes from splitting this node.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize = 1 << 5, // Saved // Disable resizing node using the splitter/separators. Useful with programmatically setup dockspaces.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar = 1 << 6, // // Tab bar will automatically hide when there is a single window in the dock node.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoUndocking = 1 << 7, // // Disable undocking this node.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplit, // Renamed in 1.90
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverCentralNode, // Renamed in 1.90
#endif
};
// Flags for ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(), ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload()
@ -1446,6 +1494,11 @@ enum ImGuiSortDirection_
ImGuiSortDirection_Descending = 2 // Descending = 9->0, Z->A etc.
};
// Since 1.90, defining IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS automatically defines IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO as well.
#if defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO)
#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
#endif
// A key identifier (ImGuiKey_XXX or ImGuiMod_XXX value): can represent Keyboard, Mouse and Gamepad values.
// All our named keys are >= 512. Keys value 0 to 511 are left unused as legacy native/opaque key values (< 1.87).
// Since >= 1.89 we increased typing (went from int to enum), some legacy code may need a cast to ImGuiKey.
@ -1479,6 +1532,8 @@ enum ImGuiKey : int
ImGuiKey_U, ImGuiKey_V, ImGuiKey_W, ImGuiKey_X, ImGuiKey_Y, ImGuiKey_Z,
ImGuiKey_F1, ImGuiKey_F2, ImGuiKey_F3, ImGuiKey_F4, ImGuiKey_F5, ImGuiKey_F6,
ImGuiKey_F7, ImGuiKey_F8, ImGuiKey_F9, ImGuiKey_F10, ImGuiKey_F11, ImGuiKey_F12,
ImGuiKey_F13, ImGuiKey_F14, ImGuiKey_F15, ImGuiKey_F16, ImGuiKey_F17, ImGuiKey_F18,
ImGuiKey_F19, ImGuiKey_F20, ImGuiKey_F21, ImGuiKey_F22, ImGuiKey_F23, ImGuiKey_F24,
ImGuiKey_Apostrophe, // '
ImGuiKey_Comma, // ,
ImGuiKey_Minus, // -
@ -1504,6 +1559,8 @@ enum ImGuiKey : int
ImGuiKey_KeypadAdd,
ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter,
ImGuiKey_KeypadEqual,
ImGuiKey_AppBack, // Available on some keyboard/mouses. Often referred as "Browser Back"
ImGuiKey_AppForward,
// Gamepad (some of those are analog values, 0.0f to 1.0f) // NAVIGATION ACTION
// (download controller mapping PNG/PSD at http://dearimgui.com/controls_sheets)
@ -1722,6 +1779,7 @@ enum ImGuiStyleVar_
ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize, // float GrabMinSize
ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding, // float GrabRounding
ImGuiStyleVar_TabRounding, // float TabRounding
ImGuiStyleVar_TabBarBorderSize, // float TabBarBorderSize
ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign, // ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign
ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, // ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign
ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextBorderSize,// float SeparatorTextBorderSize
@ -1944,6 +2002,7 @@ struct ImVector
inline bool contains(const T& v) const { const T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data++ == v) return true; return false; }
inline T* find(const T& v) { T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data == v) break; else ++data; return data; }
inline const T* find(const T& v) const { const T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data == v) break; else ++data; return data; }
inline int find_index(const T& v) const { const T* data_end = Data + Size; const T* it = find(v); if (it == data_end) return -1; const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; return (int)off; }
inline bool find_erase(const T& v) { const T* it = find(v); if (it < Data + Size) { erase(it); return true; } return false; }
inline bool find_erase_unsorted(const T& v) { const T* it = find(v); if (it < Data + Size) { erase_unsorted(it); return true; } return false; }
inline int index_from_ptr(const T* it) const { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; return (int)off; }
@ -1989,6 +2048,8 @@ struct ImGuiStyle
float TabRounding; // Radius of upper corners of a tab. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular tabs.
float TabBorderSize; // Thickness of border around tabs.
float TabMinWidthForCloseButton; // Minimum width for close button to appear on an unselected tab when hovered. Set to 0.0f to always show when hovering, set to FLT_MAX to never show close button unless selected.
float TabBarBorderSize; // Thickness of tab-bar separator, which takes on the tab active color to denote focus.
float TableAngledHeadersAngle; // Angle of angled headers (supported values range from -50.0f degrees to +50.0f degrees).
ImGuiDir ColorButtonPosition; // Side of the color button in the ColorEdit4 widget (left/right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Right.
ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign; // Alignment of button text when button is larger than text. Defaults to (0.5f, 0.5f) (centered).
ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign; // Alignment of selectable text. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.0f) (top-left aligned). It's generally important to keep this left-aligned if you want to lay multiple items on a same line.
@ -2127,11 +2188,6 @@ struct ImGuiIO
// Optional: Notify OS Input Method Editor of the screen position of your cursor for text input position (e.g. when using Japanese/Chinese IME on Windows)
// (default to use native imm32 api on Windows)
void (*SetPlatformImeDataFn)(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiPlatformImeData* data);
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
void* ImeWindowHandle; // = NULL // [Obsolete] Set ImGuiViewport::PlatformHandleRaw instead. Set this to your HWND to get automatic IME cursor positioning.
#else
void* _UnusedPadding; // Unused field to keep data structure the same size.
#endif
// Optional: Platform locale
ImWchar PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint; // '.' // [Experimental] Configure decimal point e.g. '.' or ',' useful for some languages (e.g. German), generally pulled from *localeconv()->decimal_point
@ -2179,7 +2235,6 @@ struct ImGuiIO
int MetricsRenderIndices; // Indices output during last call to Render() = number of triangles * 3
int MetricsRenderWindows; // Number of visible windows
int MetricsActiveWindows; // Number of active windows
int MetricsActiveAllocations; // Number of active allocations, updated by MemAlloc/MemFree based on current context. May be off if you have multiple imgui contexts.
ImVec2 MouseDelta; // Mouse delta. Note that this is zero if either current or previous position are invalid (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX), so a disappearing/reappearing mouse won't have a huge delta.
// Legacy: before 1.87, we required backend to fill io.KeyMap[] (imgui->native map) during initialization and io.KeysDown[] (native indices) every frame.
@ -2190,6 +2245,11 @@ struct ImGuiIO
bool KeysDown[ImGuiKey_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Input: Keyboard keys that are pressed (ideally left in the "native" order your engine has access to keyboard keys, so you can use your own defines/enums for keys). This used to be [512] sized. It is now ImGuiKey_COUNT to allow legacy io.KeysDown[GetKeyIndex(...)] to work without an overflow.
float NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Since 1.88, NavInputs[] was removed. Backends from 1.60 to 1.86 won't build. Feed gamepad inputs via io.AddKeyEvent() and ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX enums.
#endif
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
void* ImeWindowHandle; // = NULL // [Obsoleted in 1.87] Set ImGuiViewport::PlatformHandleRaw instead. Set this to your HWND to get automatic IME cursor positioning.
#else
void* _UnusedPadding;
#endif
//------------------------------------------------------------------
// [Internal] Dear ImGui will maintain those fields. Forward compatibility not guaranteed!
@ -2343,7 +2403,7 @@ struct ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs
ImGuiID ColumnUserID; // User id of the column (if specified by a TableSetupColumn() call)
ImS16 ColumnIndex; // Index of the column
ImS16 SortOrder; // Index within parent ImGuiTableSortSpecs (always stored in order starting from 0, tables sorted on a single criteria will always have a 0 here)
ImGuiSortDirection SortDirection : 8; // ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending or ImGuiSortDirection_Descending (you can use this or SortSign, whichever is more convenient for your sort function)
ImGuiSortDirection SortDirection : 8; // ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending or ImGuiSortDirection_Descending
ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
};
@ -2444,9 +2504,9 @@ struct ImGuiStorage
{
ImGuiID key;
union { int val_i; float val_f; void* val_p; };
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, int _val_i) { key = _key; val_i = _val_i; }
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, float _val_f) { key = _key; val_f = _val_f; }
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, void* _val_p) { key = _key; val_p = _val_p; }
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, int _val) { key = _key; val_i = _val; }
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, float _val) { key = _key; val_f = _val; }
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, void* _val) { key = _key; val_p = _val; }
};
ImVector<ImGuiStoragePair> Data;
@ -2473,11 +2533,10 @@ struct ImGuiStorage
IMGUI_API float* GetFloatRef(ImGuiID key, float default_val = 0.0f);
IMGUI_API void** GetVoidPtrRef(ImGuiID key, void* default_val = NULL);
// Use on your own storage if you know only integer are being stored (open/close all tree nodes)
IMGUI_API void SetAllInt(int val);
// For quicker full rebuild of a storage (instead of an incremental one), you may add all your contents and then sort once.
// Advanced: for quicker full rebuild of a storage (instead of an incremental one), you may add all your contents and then sort once.
IMGUI_API void BuildSortByKey();
// Obsolete: use on your own storage if you know only integer are being stored (open/close all tree nodes)
IMGUI_API void SetAllInt(int val);
};
// Helper: Manually clip large list of items.
@ -2622,9 +2681,9 @@ typedef void (*ImDrawCallback)(const ImDrawList* parent_list, const ImDrawCmd* c
// Special Draw callback value to request renderer backend to reset the graphics/render state.
// The renderer backend needs to handle this special value, otherwise it will crash trying to call a function at this address.
// This is useful for example if you submitted callbacks which you know have altered the render state and you want it to be restored.
// It is not done by default because they are many perfectly useful way of altering render state for imgui contents (e.g. changing shader/blending settings before an Image call).
#define ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState (ImDrawCallback)(-1)
// This is useful, for example, if you submitted callbacks which you know have altered the render state and you want it to be restored.
// Render state is not reset by default because they are many perfectly useful way of altering render state (e.g. changing shader/blending settings before an Image call).
#define ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState (ImDrawCallback)(-8)
// Typically, 1 command = 1 GPU draw call (unless command is a callback)
// - VtxOffset: When 'io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' is enabled,
@ -2788,6 +2847,8 @@ struct ImDrawList
IMGUI_API void AddCircleFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments = 0);
IMGUI_API void AddNgon(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness = 1.0f);
IMGUI_API void AddNgonFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments);
IMGUI_API void AddEllipse(const ImVec2& center, float radius_x, float radius_y, ImU32 col, float rot = 0.0f, int num_segments = 0, float thickness = 1.0f);
IMGUI_API void AddEllipseFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius_x, float radius_y, ImU32 col, float rot = 0.0f, int num_segments = 0);
IMGUI_API void AddText(const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL);
IMGUI_API void AddText(const ImFont* font, float font_size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL, float wrap_width = 0.0f, const ImVec4* cpu_fine_clip_rect = NULL);
IMGUI_API void AddPolyline(const ImVec2* points, int num_points, ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags, float thickness);
@ -2812,6 +2873,7 @@ struct ImDrawList
inline void PathStroke(ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, float thickness = 1.0f) { AddPolyline(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col, flags, thickness); _Path.Size = 0; }
IMGUI_API void PathArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments = 0);
IMGUI_API void PathArcToFast(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_of_12, int a_max_of_12); // Use precomputed angles for a 12 steps circle
IMGUI_API void PathEllipticalArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius_x, float radius_y, float rot, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments = 0); // Ellipse
IMGUI_API void PathBezierCubicCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments = 0); // Cubic Bezier (4 control points)
IMGUI_API void PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, int num_segments = 0); // Quadratic Bezier (3 control points)
IMGUI_API void PathRect(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0);
@ -2904,7 +2966,8 @@ struct ImFontConfig
float GlyphMaxAdvanceX; // FLT_MAX // Maximum AdvanceX for glyphs
bool MergeMode; // false // Merge into previous ImFont, so you can combine multiple inputs font into one ImFont (e.g. ASCII font + icons + Japanese glyphs). You may want to use GlyphOffset.y when merge font of different heights.
unsigned int FontBuilderFlags; // 0 // Settings for custom font builder. THIS IS BUILDER IMPLEMENTATION DEPENDENT. Leave as zero if unsure.
float RasterizerMultiply; // 1.0f // Brighten (>1.0f) or darken (<1.0f) font output. Brightening small fonts may be a good workaround to make them more readable.
float RasterizerMultiply; // 1.0f // Linearly brighten (>1.0f) or darken (<1.0f) font output. Brightening small fonts may be a good workaround to make them more readable. This is a silly thing we may remove in the future.
float RasterizerDensity; // 1.0f // DPI scale for rasterization, not altering other font metrics: make it easy to swap between e.g. a 100% and a 400% fonts for a zooming display. IMPORTANT: If you increase this it is expected that you increase font scale accordingly, otherwise quality may look lowered.
ImWchar EllipsisChar; // -1 // Explicitly specify unicode codepoint of ellipsis character. When fonts are being merged first specified ellipsis will be used.
// [Internal]
@ -2988,8 +3051,8 @@ struct ImFontAtlas
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFont(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg);
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontDefault(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL);
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromFileTTF(const char* filename, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL);
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* font_data, int font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // Note: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas! Will be deleted after destruction of the atlas. Set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed.
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(const void* compressed_font_data, int compressed_font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp.
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* font_data, int font_data_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // Note: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas! Will be deleted after destruction of the atlas. Set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed.
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(const void* compressed_font_data, int compressed_font_data_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp.
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(const char* compressed_font_data_base85, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data_base85' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp with -base85 parameter.
IMGUI_API void ClearInputData(); // Clear input data (all ImFontConfig structures including sizes, TTF data, glyph ranges, etc.) = all the data used to build the texture and fonts.
IMGUI_API void ClearTexData(); // Clear output texture data (CPU side). Saves RAM once the texture has been copied to graphics memory.
@ -3355,6 +3418,14 @@ namespace ImGui
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
namespace ImGui
{
// OBSOLETED in 1.90.0 (from September 2023)
static inline bool BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = 0) { return BeginChild(id, size, ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle, window_flags); }
static inline void EndChildFrame() { EndChild(); }
//static inline bool BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags){ return BeginChild(str_id, size_arg, border ? ImGuiChildFlags_Border : ImGuiChildFlags_None, window_flags); } // Unnecessary as true == ImGuiChildFlags_Border
//static inline bool BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags) { return BeginChild(id, size_arg, border ? ImGuiChildFlags_Border : ImGuiChildFlags_None, window_flags); } // Unnecessary as true == ImGuiChildFlags_Border
static inline void ShowStackToolWindow(bool* p_open = NULL) { ShowIDStackToolWindow(p_open); }
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*old_callback)(void* user_data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* user_data, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*old_callback)(void* user_data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* user_data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
// OBSOLETED in 1.89.7 (from June 2023)
IMGUI_API void SetItemAllowOverlap(); // Use SetNextItemAllowOverlap() before item.
// OBSOLETED in 1.89.4 (from March 2023)
@ -3367,10 +3438,10 @@ namespace ImGui
static inline void CaptureMouseFromApp(bool want_capture_mouse = true) { SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(want_capture_mouse); } // Renamed as name was misleading + removed default value.
// OBSOLETED in 1.86 (from November 2021)
IMGUI_API void CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end); // Calculate coarse clipping for large list of evenly sized items. Prefer using ImGuiListClipper.
// OBSOLETED in 1.85 (from August 2021)
static inline float GetWindowContentRegionWidth() { return GetWindowContentRegionMax().x - GetWindowContentRegionMin().x; }
// Some of the older obsolete names along with their replacement (commented out so they are not reported in IDE)
//-- OBSOLETED in 1.85 (from August 2021)
//static inline float GetWindowContentRegionWidth() { return GetWindowContentRegionMax().x - GetWindowContentRegionMin().x; }
//-- OBSOLETED in 1.81 (from February 2021)
//static inline bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)) { return BeginListBox(label, size); }
//static inline bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1) { float height = GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * ((height_in_items < 0 ? ImMin(items_count, 7) : height_in_items) + 0.25f) + GetStyle().FramePadding.y * 2.0f; return BeginListBox(label, ImVec2(0.0f, height)); } // Helper to calculate size from items_count and height_in_items
@ -3421,21 +3492,21 @@ namespace ImGui
//static inline void SetScrollPosHere() { SetScrollHere(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.42
}
// OBSOLETED in 1.82 (from Mars 2021): flags for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), AddImageRounded(), PathRect()
typedef ImDrawFlags ImDrawCornerFlags;
enum ImDrawCornerFlags_
{
ImDrawCornerFlags_None = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone, // Was == 0 prior to 1.82, this is now == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone which is != 0 and not implicit
ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft, // Was == 0x01 (1 << 0) prior to 1.82. Order matches ImDrawFlags_NoRoundCorner* flag (we exploit this internally).
ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight, // Was == 0x02 (1 << 1) prior to 1.82.
ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft, // Was == 0x04 (1 << 2) prior to 1.82.
ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight, // Was == 0x08 (1 << 3) prior to 1.82.
ImDrawCornerFlags_All = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, // Was == 0x0F prior to 1.82
ImDrawCornerFlags_Top = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight,
ImDrawCornerFlags_Bot = ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight,
ImDrawCornerFlags_Left = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft,
ImDrawCornerFlags_Right = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight,
};
//-- OBSOLETED in 1.82 (from Mars 2021): flags for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), AddImageRounded(), PathRect()
//typedef ImDrawFlags ImDrawCornerFlags;
//enum ImDrawCornerFlags_
//{
// ImDrawCornerFlags_None = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone, // Was == 0 prior to 1.82, this is now == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone which is != 0 and not implicit
// ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft, // Was == 0x01 (1 << 0) prior to 1.82. Order matches ImDrawFlags_NoRoundCorner* flag (we exploit this internally).
// ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight, // Was == 0x02 (1 << 1) prior to 1.82.
// ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft, // Was == 0x04 (1 << 2) prior to 1.82.
// ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight, // Was == 0x08 (1 << 3) prior to 1.82.
// ImDrawCornerFlags_All = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, // Was == 0x0F prior to 1.82
// ImDrawCornerFlags_Top = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight,
// ImDrawCornerFlags_Bot = ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight,
// ImDrawCornerFlags_Left = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft,
// ImDrawCornerFlags_Right = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight,
//};
// RENAMED and MERGED both ImGuiKey_ModXXX and ImGuiModFlags_XXX into ImGuiMod_XXX (from September 2022)
// RENAMED ImGuiKeyModFlags -> ImGuiModFlags in 1.88 (from April 2022). Exceptionally commented out ahead of obscolescence schedule to reduce confusion and because they were not meant to be used in the first place.
@ -3444,6 +3515,8 @@ enum ImGuiModFlags_ { ImGuiModFlags_None = 0, ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl = ImGuiMod_Ctrl
//typedef ImGuiKeyChord ImGuiKeyModFlags; // == int
//enum ImGuiKeyModFlags_ { ImGuiKeyModFlags_None = 0, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Ctrl = ImGuiMod_Ctrl, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Shift = ImGuiMod_Shift, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Alt = ImGuiMod_Alt, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Super = ImGuiMod_Super };
#define IM_OFFSETOF(_TYPE,_MEMBER) offsetof(_TYPE, _MEMBER) // OBSOLETED IN 1.90 (now using C++11 standard version)
#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
// RENAMED IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW > IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS in 1.88 (from June 2022)

346
imgui/imgui_demo.cpp
View File

@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
// dear imgui, v1.89.9
// dear imgui, v1.90.0
// (demo code)
// Help:
@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open)
// Dear ImGui Tools (accessible from the "Tools" menu)
static bool show_tool_metrics = false;
static bool show_tool_debug_log = false;
static bool show_tool_stack_tool = false;
static bool show_tool_id_stack_tool = false;
static bool show_tool_style_editor = false;
static bool show_tool_about = false;
@ -312,8 +312,8 @@ void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open)
ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(&show_tool_metrics);
if (show_tool_debug_log)
ImGui::ShowDebugLogWindow(&show_tool_debug_log);
if (show_tool_stack_tool)
ImGui::ShowStackToolWindow(&show_tool_stack_tool);
if (show_tool_id_stack_tool)
ImGui::ShowIDStackToolWindow(&show_tool_id_stack_tool);
if (show_tool_style_editor)
{
ImGui::Begin("Dear ImGui Style Editor", &show_tool_style_editor);
@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open)
#endif
ImGui::MenuItem("Metrics/Debugger", NULL, &show_tool_metrics, has_debug_tools);
ImGui::MenuItem("Debug Log", NULL, &show_tool_debug_log, has_debug_tools);
ImGui::MenuItem("Stack Tool", NULL, &show_tool_stack_tool, has_debug_tools);
ImGui::MenuItem("ID Stack Tool", NULL, &show_tool_id_stack_tool, has_debug_tools);
ImGui::MenuItem("Style Editor", NULL, &show_tool_style_editor);
ImGui::MenuItem("About Dear ImGui", NULL, &show_tool_about);
ImGui::EndMenu();
@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open)
ImGui::BulletText("See the ShowDemoWindow() code in imgui_demo.cpp. <- you are here!");
ImGui::BulletText("See comments in imgui.cpp.");
ImGui::BulletText("See example applications in the examples/ folder.");
ImGui::BulletText("Read the FAQ at http://www.dearimgui.com/faq/");
ImGui::BulletText("Read the FAQ at https://www.dearimgui.com/faq/");
ImGui::BulletText("Set 'io.ConfigFlags |= NavEnableKeyboard' for keyboard controls.");
ImGui::BulletText("Set 'io.ConfigFlags |= NavEnableGamepad' for gamepad controls.");
@ -887,13 +887,18 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
ImGui::SeparatorText("Custom");
HelpMarker(
"Passing ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip to IsItemHovered() is the preferred way to standardize"
"tooltip activation details across your application. You may however decide to use custom"
"flags for a specific tooltip instance.");
// The following examples are passed for documentation purpose but may not be useful to most users.
// Passing ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip to IsItemHovered() will pull ImGuiHoveredFlags flags values from
// Passing ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip to IsItemHovered() will pull ImGuiHoveredFlags flags values from
// 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav' depending on whether mouse or gamepad/keyboard is being used.
// With default settings, ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip is equivalent to ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort + ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary.
// With default settings, ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip is equivalent to ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort + ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary.
ImGui::Button("Manual", sz);
if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip))
ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a manually emitted tooltip");
ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a manually emitted tooltip.");
ImGui::Button("DelayNone", sz);
if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNone))
@ -905,12 +910,21 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
ImGui::Button("DelayLong", sz);
if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay))
ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip with a long delay (%0.2f sec)", ImGui::GetStyle().HoverDelayNormal);
ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip with a long delay (%0.2f sec).", ImGui::GetStyle().HoverDelayNormal);
ImGui::Button("Stationary", sz);
if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary))
ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip requiring mouse to be stationary before activating.");
// Using ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip will pull flags from 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav',
// which default value include the ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled flag.
// As a result, Set
ImGui::BeginDisabled();
ImGui::Button("Disabled item", sz);
ImGui::EndDisabled();
if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip))
ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a a tooltip for a disabled item.");
ImGui::TreePop();
}
@ -920,10 +934,10 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
// if (once)
// ImGui::Text("This will be displayed only once.");
IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Trees");
if (ImGui::TreeNode("Trees"))
IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tree Nodes");
if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tree Nodes"))
{
IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Trees/Basic trees");
IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tree Nodes/Basic trees");
if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic trees"))
{
for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
@ -944,7 +958,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
ImGui::TreePop();
}
IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Trees/Advanced, with Selectable nodes");
IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tree Nodes/Advanced, with Selectable nodes");
if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced, with Selectable nodes"))
{
HelpMarker(
@ -957,6 +971,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick", &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth", &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Extend hit area to all available width instead of allowing more items to be laid out after the node.");
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth", &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAllColumns", &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAllColumns); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("For use in Tables only.");
ImGui::Checkbox("Align label with current X position", &align_label_with_current_x_position);
ImGui::Checkbox("Test tree node as drag source", &test_drag_and_drop);
ImGui::Text("Hello!");
@ -1237,7 +1252,17 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview; // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both
if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton; // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both
flags &= ~(ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_WidthFitPreview); // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both
if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_WidthFitPreview", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_WidthFitPreview))
flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview;
// Override default popup height
if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall))
flags &= ~(ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_ & ~ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall);
if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular))
flags &= ~(ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_ & ~ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular);
if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest))
flags &= ~(ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_ & ~ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest);
// Using the generic BeginCombo() API, you have full control over how to display the combo contents.
// (your selection data could be an index, a pointer to the object, an id for the object, a flag intrusively
@ -1260,6 +1285,10 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
ImGui::EndCombo();
}
ImGui::Spacing();
ImGui::SeparatorText("One-liner variants");
HelpMarker("Flags above don't apply to this section.");
// Simplified one-liner Combo() API, using values packed in a single constant string
// This is a convenience for when the selection set is small and known at compile-time.
static int item_current_2 = 0;
@ -1271,9 +1300,8 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
ImGui::Combo("combo 3 (array)", &item_current_3, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
// Simplified one-liner Combo() using an accessor function
struct Funcs { static bool ItemGetter(void* data, int n, const char** out_str) { *out_str = ((const char**)data)[n]; return true; } };
static int item_current_4 = 0;
ImGui::Combo("combo 4 (function)", &item_current_4, &Funcs::ItemGetter, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
ImGui::Combo("combo 4 (function)", &item_current_4, [](void* data, int n) { return ((const char**)data)[n]; }, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
ImGui::TreePop();
}
@ -1281,6 +1309,9 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/List Boxes");
if (ImGui::TreeNode("List boxes"))
{
// BeginListBox() is essentially a thin wrapper to using BeginChild()/EndChild() with the ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle flag for stylistic changes + displaying a label.
// You may be tempted to simply use BeginChild() directly, however note that BeginChild() requires EndChild() to always be called (inconsistent with BeginListBox()/EndListBox()).
// Using the generic BeginListBox() API, you have full control over how to display the combo contents.
// (your selection data could be an index, a pointer to the object, an id for the object, a flag intrusively
// stored in the object itself, etc.)
@ -2471,6 +2502,36 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
ImGui::TreePop();
}
IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and Drop/Tooltip at target location");
if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tooltip at target location"))
{
for (int n = 0; n < 2; n++)
{
// Drop targets
ImGui::Button(n ? "drop here##1" : "drop here##0");
if (ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget())
{
ImGuiDragDropFlags drop_target_flags = ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery | ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip;
if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F, drop_target_flags))
{
IM_UNUSED(payload);
ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed);
ImGui::BeginTooltip();
ImGui::Text("Cannot drop here!");
ImGui::EndTooltip();
}
ImGui::EndDragDropTarget();
}
// Drop source
static ImVec4 col4 = { 1.0f, 0.0f, 0.2f, 1.0f };
if (n == 0)
ImGui::ColorButton("drag me", col4);
}
ImGui::TreePop();
}
ImGui::TreePop();
}
@ -2592,7 +2653,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
static bool embed_all_inside_a_child_window = false;
ImGui::Checkbox("Embed everything inside a child window for testing _RootWindow flag.", &embed_all_inside_a_child_window);
if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window)
ImGui::BeginChild("outer_child", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20.0f), true);
ImGui::BeginChild("outer_child", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20.0f), ImGuiChildFlags_Border);
// Testing IsWindowFocused() function with its various flags.
ImGui::BulletText(
@ -2652,7 +2713,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow),
ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary));
ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 50), true);
ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 50), ImGuiChildFlags_Border);
ImGui::Text("This is another child window for testing the _ChildWindows flag.");
ImGui::EndChild();
if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window)
@ -2739,7 +2800,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar;
if (disable_mouse_wheel)
window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse;
ImGui::BeginChild("ChildL", ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f, 260), false, window_flags);
ImGui::BeginChild("ChildL", ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f, 260), ImGuiChildFlags_None, window_flags);
for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
ImGui::Text("%04d: scrollable region", i);
ImGui::EndChild();
@ -2755,7 +2816,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
if (!disable_menu)
window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, 5.0f);
ImGui::BeginChild("ChildR", ImVec2(0, 260), true, window_flags);
ImGui::BeginChild("ChildR", ImVec2(0, 260), ImGuiChildFlags_Border, window_flags);
if (!disable_menu && ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
{
if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu"))
@ -2780,6 +2841,35 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
ImGui::PopStyleVar();
}
// Child 3: manual-resize
ImGui::SeparatorText("Manual-resize");
{
HelpMarker("Drag bottom border to resize. Double-click bottom border to auto-fit to vertical contents.");
ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, ImGui::GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_FrameBg));
if (ImGui::BeginChild("ResizableChild", ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 8), ImGuiChildFlags_Border | ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeY))
for (int n = 0; n < 10; n++)
ImGui::Text("Line %04d", n);
ImGui::PopStyleColor();
ImGui::EndChild();
}
// Child 4: auto-resizing height with a limit
ImGui::SeparatorText("Auto-resize with constraints");
{
static int draw_lines = 3;
static int max_height_in_lines = 10;
ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
ImGui::DragInt("Lines Count", &draw_lines, 0.2f);
ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
ImGui::DragInt("Max Height (in Lines)", &max_height_in_lines, 0.2f);
ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0.0f, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 1), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * max_height_in_lines));
if (ImGui::BeginChild("ConstrainedChild", ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f), ImGuiChildFlags_Border | ImGuiChildFlags_AutoResizeY))
for (int n = 0; n < draw_lines; n++)
ImGui::Text("Line %04d", n);
ImGui::EndChild();
}
ImGui::SeparatorText("Misc/Advanced");
// Demonstrate a few extra things
@ -2791,19 +2881,33 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
// the POV of the parent window). See 'Demo->Querying Status (Edited/Active/Hovered etc.)' for details.
{
static int offset_x = 0;
static bool override_bg_color = true;
static ImGuiChildFlags child_flags = ImGuiChildFlags_Border | ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeX | ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeY;
ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
ImGui::DragInt("Offset X", &offset_x, 1.0f, -1000, 1000);
ImGui::Checkbox("Override ChildBg color", &override_bg_color);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiChildFlags_Border", &child_flags, ImGuiChildFlags_Border);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiChildFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding", &child_flags, ImGuiChildFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeX", &child_flags, ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeX);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeY", &child_flags, ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeY);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle", &child_flags, ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle);
ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Style the child window like a framed item: use FrameBg, FrameRounding, FrameBorderSize, FramePadding instead of ChildBg, ChildRounding, ChildBorderSize, WindowPadding.");
if (child_flags & ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle)
override_bg_color = false;
ImGui::SetCursorPosX(ImGui::GetCursorPosX() + (float)offset_x);
ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 100));
ImGui::BeginChild("Red", ImVec2(200, 100), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_None);
if (override_bg_color)
ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 100));
ImGui::BeginChild("Red", ImVec2(200, 100), child_flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_None);
if (override_bg_color)
ImGui::PopStyleColor();
for (int n = 0; n < 50; n++)
ImGui::Text("Some test %d", n);
ImGui::EndChild();
bool child_is_hovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
ImVec2 child_rect_min = ImGui::GetItemRectMin();
ImVec2 child_rect_max = ImGui::GetItemRectMax();
ImGui::PopStyleColor();
ImGui::Text("Hovered: %d", child_is_hovered);
ImGui::Text("Rect of child window is: (%.0f,%.0f) (%.0f,%.0f)", child_rect_min.x, child_rect_min.y, child_rect_max.x, child_rect_max.y);
}
@ -3192,7 +3296,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
const ImGuiWindowFlags child_flags = enable_extra_decorations ? ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar : 0;
const ImGuiID child_id = ImGui::GetID((void*)(intptr_t)i);
const bool child_is_visible = ImGui::BeginChild(child_id, ImVec2(child_w, 200.0f), true, child_flags);
const bool child_is_visible = ImGui::BeginChild(child_id, ImVec2(child_w, 200.0f), ImGuiChildFlags_Border, child_flags);
if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
{
ImGui::TextUnformatted("abc");
@ -3239,7 +3343,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
float child_height = ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() + style.ScrollbarSize + style.WindowPadding.y * 2.0f;
ImGuiWindowFlags child_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar | (enable_extra_decorations ? ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar : 0);
ImGuiID child_id = ImGui::GetID((void*)(intptr_t)i);
bool child_is_visible = ImGui::BeginChild(child_id, ImVec2(-100, child_height), true, child_flags);
bool child_is_visible = ImGui::BeginChild(child_id, ImVec2(-100, child_height), ImGuiChildFlags_Border, child_flags);
if (scroll_to_off)
ImGui::SetScrollX(scroll_to_off_px);
if (scroll_to_pos)
@ -3281,7 +3385,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding, 3.0f);
ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(2.0f, 1.0f));
ImVec2 scrolling_child_size = ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing() * 7 + 30);
ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", scrolling_child_size, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", scrolling_child_size, ImGuiChildFlags_Border, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
for (int line = 0; line < lines; line++)
{
// Display random stuff. For the sake of this trivial demo we are using basic Button() + SameLine()
@ -3425,7 +3529,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
}
if (show_child)
{
ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 0), true);
ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiChildFlags_Border);
ImGui::EndChild();
}
ImGui::End();
@ -3977,6 +4081,7 @@ static void EditTableColumnsFlags(ImGuiTableColumnFlags* p_flags)
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_PreferSortDescending", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IndentEnable", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Default for column 0");
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IndentDisable", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Default for column >0");
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_AngledHeader", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader);
}
static void ShowTableColumnsStatusFlags(ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags)
@ -4001,10 +4106,10 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
ImGui::PushID("Tables");
int open_action = -1;
if (ImGui::Button("Open all"))
if (ImGui::Button("Expand all"))
open_action = 1;
ImGui::SameLine();
if (ImGui::Button("Close all"))
if (ImGui::Button("Collapse all"))
open_action = 0;
ImGui::SameLine();
@ -4290,6 +4395,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable vertical borders in columns Body until hovered for resize (borders will always appear in Headers)");
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn);
PopStyleCompact();
if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags))
@ -4722,8 +4828,14 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
ImVec2 outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 9);
if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_columns_flags", column_count, flags, outer_size))
{
bool has_angled_header = false;
for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++)
{
has_angled_header |= (column_flags[column] & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader) != 0;
ImGui::TableSetupColumn(column_names[column], column_flags[column]);
}
if (has_angled_header)
ImGui::TableAngledHeadersRow();
ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++)
column_flags_out[column] = ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(column);
@ -5047,6 +5159,11 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
{
static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody;
static ImGuiTreeNodeFlags tree_node_flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAllColumns;
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth", &tree_node_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAllColumns", &tree_node_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAllColumns);
HelpMarker("See \"Columns flags\" section to configure how indentation is applied to individual columns.");
if (ImGui::BeginTable("3ways", 3, flags))
{
// The first column will use the default _WidthStretch when ScrollX is Off and _WidthFixed when ScrollX is On
@ -5070,7 +5187,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
const bool is_folder = (node->ChildCount > 0);
if (is_folder)
{
bool open = ImGui::TreeNodeEx(node->Name, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth);
bool open = ImGui::TreeNodeEx(node->Name, tree_node_flags);
ImGui::TableNextColumn();
ImGui::TextDisabled("--");
ImGui::TableNextColumn();
@ -5084,7 +5201,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
}
else
{
ImGui::TreeNodeEx(node->Name, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth);
ImGui::TreeNodeEx(node->Name, tree_node_flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen);
ImGui::TableNextColumn();
ImGui::Text("%d", node->Size);
ImGui::TableNextColumn();
@ -5205,6 +5322,59 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
ImGui::TreePop();
}
// Demonstrate using ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader flag to create angled headers
if (open_action != -1)
ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Angled headers");
if (ImGui::TreeNode("Angled headers"))
{
const char* column_names[] = { "Track", "cabasa", "ride", "smash", "tom-hi", "tom-mid", "tom-low", "hihat-o", "hihat-c", "snare-s", "snare-c", "clap", "rim", "kick" };
const int columns_count = IM_ARRAYSIZE(column_names);
const int rows_count = 12;
static ImGuiTableFlags table_flags = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn;
static bool bools[columns_count * rows_count] = {}; // Dummy storage selection storage
static int frozen_cols = 1;
static int frozen_rows = 2;
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_ScrollX", &table_flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_ScrollY", &table_flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoBordersInBody", &table_flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_HighlightHoveredColumn", &table_flags, ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn);
ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
ImGui::SliderInt("Frozen columns", &frozen_cols, 0, 2);
ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
ImGui::SliderInt("Frozen rows", &frozen_rows, 0, 2);
if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_angled_headers", columns_count, table_flags, ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 12)))
{
ImGui::TableSetupColumn(column_names[0], ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder);
for (int n = 1; n < columns_count; n++)
ImGui::TableSetupColumn(column_names[n], ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed);
ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(frozen_cols, frozen_rows);
ImGui::TableAngledHeadersRow(); // Draw angled headers for all columns with the ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader flag.
ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); // Draw remaining headers and allow access to context-menu and other functions.
for (int row = 0; row < rows_count; row++)
{
ImGui::PushID(row);
ImGui::TableNextRow();
ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0);
ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
ImGui::Text("Track %d", row);
for (int column = 1; column < columns_count; column++)
if (ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column))
{
ImGui::PushID(column);
ImGui::Checkbox("", &bools[row * columns_count + column]);
ImGui::PopID();
}
ImGui::PopID();
}
ImGui::EndTable();
}
ImGui::TreePop();
}
// Demonstrate creating custom context menus inside columns, while playing it nice with context menus provided by TableHeadersRow()/TableHeader()
if (open_action != -1)
ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
@ -5323,6 +5493,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings;
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn);
for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++)
{
char buf[32];
@ -5450,6 +5621,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
| ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody
| ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY
| ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit;
static ImGuiTableColumnFlags columns_base_flags = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None;
enum ContentsType { CT_Text, CT_Button, CT_SmallButton, CT_FillButton, CT_Selectable, CT_SelectableSpanRow };
static int contents_type = CT_SelectableSpanRow;
@ -5543,9 +5715,17 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
ImGui::TreePop();
}
if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Other:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Headers:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
{
ImGui::Checkbox("show_headers", &show_headers);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn);
ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader", &columns_base_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader);
ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable AngledHeader on all columns. Best enabled on selected narrow columns (see \"Angled headers\" section of the demo).");
ImGui::TreePop();
}
if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Other:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
{
ImGui::Checkbox("show_wrapped_text", &show_wrapped_text);
ImGui::DragFloat2("##OuterSize", &outer_size_value.x);
@ -5606,12 +5786,12 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
// Declare columns
// We use the "user_id" parameter of TableSetupColumn() to specify a user id that will be stored in the sort specifications.
// This is so our sort function can identify a column given our own identifier. We could also identify them based on their index!
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("ID", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_ID);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Name", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Name);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Action", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Action);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Quantity", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Quantity);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Description", (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX) ? 0 : ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Description);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Hidden", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("ID", columns_base_flags | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_ID);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Name", columns_base_flags | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Name);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Action", columns_base_flags | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Action);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Quantity", columns_base_flags | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Quantity);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Description", columns_base_flags | ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX) ? 0 : ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch), 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Description);
ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Hidden", columns_base_flags | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort);
ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(freeze_cols, freeze_rows);
// Sort our data if sort specs have been changed!
@ -5630,6 +5810,8 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
const bool sorts_specs_using_quantity = (ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(3) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted) != 0;
// Show headers
if (show_headers && (columns_base_flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader) != 0)
ImGui::TableAngledHeadersRow();
if (show_headers)
ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
@ -5897,7 +6079,7 @@ static void ShowDemoWindowColumns()
{
ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(1500.0f, 0.0f));
ImVec2 child_size = ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20.0f);
ImGui::BeginChild("##ScrollingRegion", child_size, false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
ImGui::BeginChild("##ScrollingRegion", child_size, ImGuiChildFlags_None, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
ImGui::Columns(10);
// Also demonstrate using clipper for large vertical lists
@ -6189,7 +6371,7 @@ void ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open)
bool copy_to_clipboard = ImGui::Button("Copy to clipboard");
ImVec2 child_size = ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 18);
ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGui::GetID("cfg_infos"), child_size, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);
ImGui::BeginChild(ImGui::GetID("cfg_infos"), child_size, ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle);
if (copy_to_clipboard)
{
ImGui::LogToClipboard();
@ -6326,7 +6508,7 @@ void ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open)
ImGui::LogText("\n```\n");
ImGui::LogFinish();
}
ImGui::EndChildFrame();
ImGui::EndChild();
}
ImGui::End();
}
@ -6437,7 +6619,6 @@ void ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref)
ImGui::SeparatorText("Main");
ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowPadding", (float*)&style.WindowPadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderFloat2("FramePadding", (float*)&style.FramePadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderFloat2("CellPadding", (float*)&style.CellPadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemInnerSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemInnerSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderFloat2("TouchExtraPadding", (float*)&style.TouchExtraPadding, 0.0f, 10.0f, "%.0f");
@ -6451,6 +6632,7 @@ void ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref)
ImGui::SliderFloat("PopupBorderSize", &style.PopupBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameBorderSize", &style.FrameBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderFloat("TabBorderSize", &style.TabBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderFloat("TabBarBorderSize", &style.TabBarBorderSize, 0.0f, 2.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SeparatorText("Rounding");
ImGui::SliderFloat("WindowRounding", &style.WindowRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
@ -6461,6 +6643,10 @@ void ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref)
ImGui::SliderFloat("GrabRounding", &style.GrabRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderFloat("TabRounding", &style.TabRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SeparatorText("Tables");
ImGui::SliderFloat2("CellPadding", (float*)&style.CellPadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::SliderAngle("TableAngledHeadersAngle", &style.TableAngledHeadersAngle, -50.0f, +50.0f);
ImGui::SeparatorText("Widgets");
ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowTitleAlign", (float*)&style.WindowTitleAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f");
int window_menu_button_position = style.WindowMenuButtonPosition + 1;
@ -6534,8 +6720,9 @@ void ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref)
"Left-click on color square to open color picker,\n"
"Right-click to open edit options menu.");
ImGui::BeginChild("##colors", ImVec2(0, 0), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened);
ImGui::PushItemWidth(-160);
ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0.0f, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 10), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX));
ImGui::BeginChild("##colors", ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiChildFlags_Border, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened);
ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * -12);
for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++)
{
const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName(i);
@ -6761,7 +6948,7 @@ static void ShowExampleMenuFile()
{
static bool enabled = true;
ImGui::MenuItem("Enabled", "", &enabled);
ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 60), true);
ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 60), ImGuiChildFlags_Border);
for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++)
ImGui::Text("Scrolling Text %d", i);
ImGui::EndChild();
@ -6927,7 +7114,7 @@ struct ExampleAppConsole
// Reserve enough left-over height for 1 separator + 1 input text
const float footer_height_to_reserve = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y + ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing();
if (ImGui::BeginChild("ScrollingRegion", ImVec2(0, -footer_height_to_reserve), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar))
if (ImGui::BeginChild("ScrollingRegion", ImVec2(0, -footer_height_to_reserve), ImGuiChildFlags_None, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar))
{
if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow())
{
@ -7238,7 +7425,7 @@ struct ExampleAppLog
ImGui::Separator();
if (ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", ImVec2(0, 0), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar))
if (ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiChildFlags_None, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar))
{
if (clear)
Clear();
@ -7357,7 +7544,7 @@ static void ShowExampleAppLayout(bool* p_open)
// Left
static int selected = 0;
{
ImGui::BeginChild("left pane", ImVec2(150, 0), true);
ImGui::BeginChild("left pane", ImVec2(150, 0), ImGuiChildFlags_Border | ImGuiChildFlags_ResizeX);
for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
{
// FIXME: Good candidate to use ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnNav
@ -7585,18 +7772,31 @@ static void ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize(bool* p_open)
{
// Helper functions to demonstrate programmatic constraints
// FIXME: This doesn't take account of decoration size (e.g. title bar), library should make this easier.
static void AspectRatio(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data) { float aspect_ratio = *(float*)data->UserData; data->DesiredSize.x = IM_MAX(data->CurrentSize.x, data->CurrentSize.y); data->DesiredSize.y = (float)(int)(data->DesiredSize.x / aspect_ratio); }
static void Square(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data) { data->DesiredSize.x = data->DesiredSize.y = IM_MAX(data->CurrentSize.x, data->CurrentSize.y); }
static void Step(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data) { float step = *(float*)data->UserData; data->DesiredSize = ImVec2((int)(data->CurrentSize.x / step + 0.5f) * step, (int)(data->CurrentSize.y / step + 0.5f) * step); }
// FIXME: None of the three demos works consistently when resizing from borders.
static void AspectRatio(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data)
{
float aspect_ratio = *(float*)data->UserData;
data->DesiredSize.y = (float)(int)(data->DesiredSize.x / aspect_ratio);
}
static void Square(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data)
{
data->DesiredSize.x = data->DesiredSize.y = IM_MAX(data->DesiredSize.x, data->DesiredSize.y);
}
static void Step(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data)
{
float step = *(float*)data->UserData;
data->DesiredSize = ImVec2((int)(data->DesiredSize.x / step + 0.5f) * step, (int)(data->DesiredSize.y / step + 0.5f) * step);
}
};
const char* test_desc[] =
{
"Between 100x100 and 500x500",
"At least 100x100",
"Resize vertical only",
"Resize horizontal only",
"Resize vertical + lock current width",
"Resize horizontal + lock current height",
"Width Between 400 and 500",
"Height at least 400",
"Custom: Aspect Ratio 16:9",
"Custom: Always Square",
"Custom: Fixed Steps (100)",
@ -7605,7 +7805,7 @@ static void ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize(bool* p_open)
// Options
static bool auto_resize = false;
static bool window_padding = true;
static int type = 5; // Aspect Ratio
static int type = 6; // Aspect Ratio
static int display_lines = 10;
// Submit constraint
@ -7613,12 +7813,13 @@ static void ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize(bool* p_open)
float fixed_step = 100.0f;
if (type == 0) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(100, 100), ImVec2(500, 500)); // Between 100x100 and 500x500
if (type == 1) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(100, 100), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX)); // Width > 100, Height > 100
if (type == 2) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(-1, 0), ImVec2(-1, FLT_MAX)); // Vertical only
if (type == 3) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, -1), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, -1)); // Horizontal only
if (type == 2) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(-1, 0), ImVec2(-1, FLT_MAX)); // Resize vertical + lock current width
if (type == 3) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, -1), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, -1)); // Resize horizontal + lock current height
if (type == 4) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(400, -1), ImVec2(500, -1)); // Width Between and 400 and 500
if (type == 5) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::AspectRatio, (void*)&aspect_ratio); // Aspect ratio
if (type == 6) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Square); // Always Square
if (type == 7) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Step, (void*)&fixed_step); // Fixed Step
if (type == 5) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(-1, 500), ImVec2(-1, FLT_MAX)); // Height at least 400
if (type == 6) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::AspectRatio, (void*)&aspect_ratio); // Aspect ratio
if (type == 7) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Square); // Always Square
if (type == 8) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Step, (void*)&fixed_step); // Fixed Step
// Submit window
if (!window_padding)
@ -7873,6 +8074,7 @@ static void ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(bool* p_open)
float th = (n == 0) ? 1.0f : thickness;
draw_list->AddNgon(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, ngon_sides, th); x += sz + spacing; // N-gon
draw_list->AddCircle(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, circle_segments, th); x += sz + spacing; // Circle
draw_list->AddEllipse(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, sz*0.3f, col, -0.3f, circle_segments, th); x += sz + spacing; // Ellipse
draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, 0.0f, ImDrawFlags_None, th); x += sz + spacing; // Square
draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_None, th); x += sz + spacing; // Square with all rounded corners
draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, rounding, corners_tl_br, th); x += sz + spacing; // Square with two rounded corners
@ -7893,8 +8095,9 @@ static void ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(bool* p_open)
x = p.x + 4;
y += sz + spacing;
}
draw_list->AddNgonFilled(ImVec2(x + sz * 0.5f, y + sz * 0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, ngon_sides); x += sz + spacing; // N-gon
draw_list->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, circle_segments); x += sz + spacing; // Circle
draw_list->AddNgonFilled(ImVec2(x + sz * 0.5f, y + sz * 0.5f), sz * 0.5f, col, ngon_sides); x += sz + spacing; // N-gon
draw_list->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(x + sz * 0.5f, y + sz * 0.5f), sz * 0.5f, col, circle_segments); x += sz + spacing; // Circle
draw_list->AddEllipseFilled(ImVec2(x + sz * 0.5f, y + sz * 0.5f), sz * 0.5f, sz * 0.3f, col, -0.3f, circle_segments); x += sz + spacing;// Ellipse
draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col); x += sz + spacing; // Square
draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, 10.0f); x += sz + spacing; // Square with all rounded corners
draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, 10.0f, corners_tl_br); x += sz + spacing; // Square with two rounded corners
@ -7905,7 +8108,7 @@ static void ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(bool* p_open)
draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + 1, y + 1), col); x += sz; // Pixel (faster than AddLine)
draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 255), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255));
ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2((sz + spacing) * 10.2f, (sz + spacing) * 3.0f));
ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2((sz + spacing) * 11.2f, (sz + spacing) * 3.0f));
ImGui::PopItemWidth();
ImGui::EndTabItem();
}
@ -7927,7 +8130,7 @@ static void ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(bool* p_open)
// To use a child window instead we could use, e.g:
// ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0)); // Disable padding
// ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255)); // Set a background color
// ImGui::BeginChild("canvas", ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);
// ImGui::BeginChild("canvas", ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), ImGuiChildFlags_Border, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);
// ImGui::PopStyleColor();
// ImGui::PopStyleVar();
// [...]
@ -8076,7 +8279,7 @@ static void ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(bool* p_open)
// Note: You can use most Docking facilities without calling any API. You DO NOT need to call DockSpace() to use Docking!
// - Drag from window title bar or their tab to dock/undock. Hold SHIFT to disable docking.
// - Drag from window menu button (upper-left button) to undock an entire node (all windows).
// - When io.ConfigDockingWithShift == true, you instead need to hold SHIFT to _enable_ docking/undocking.
// - When io.ConfigDockingWithShift == true, you instead need to hold SHIFT to enable docking.
// About dockspaces:
// - Use DockSpace() to create an explicit dock node _within_ an existing window.
// - Use DockSpaceOverViewport() to create an explicit dock node covering the screen or a specific viewport.
@ -8168,10 +8371,11 @@ void ShowExampleAppDockSpace(bool* p_open)
ImGui::MenuItem("Padding", NULL, &opt_padding);
ImGui::Separator();
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoSplit", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit) != 0)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit; }
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoResize", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize) != 0)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize; }
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoDockingInCentralNode", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode) != 0)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode; }
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: AutoHideTabBar", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar) != 0)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar; }
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoDockingOverCentralNode", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverCentralNode) != 0)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverCentralNode; }
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoDockingSplit", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplit) != 0)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplit; }
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoUndocking", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoUndocking) != 0)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoUndocking; }
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoResize", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize) != 0)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize; }
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: AutoHideTabBar", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar) != 0)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar; }
if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: PassthruCentralNode", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode) != 0, opt_fullscreen)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode; }
ImGui::Separator();
@ -8498,13 +8702,13 @@ void ShowExampleAppDocuments(bool* p_open)
{
ImGui::Text("Save change to the following items?");
float item_height = ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing();
if (ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGui::GetID("frame"), ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 6.25f * item_height)))
if (ImGui::BeginChild(ImGui::GetID("frame"), ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 6.25f * item_height), ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle))
{
for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
if (close_queue[n]->Dirty)
ImGui::Text("%s", close_queue[n]->Name);
}
ImGui::EndChildFrame();
ImGui::EndChild();
ImVec2 button_size(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 7.0f, 0.0f);
if (ImGui::Button("Yes", button_size))

174
imgui/imgui_draw.cpp
View File

@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
// dear imgui, v1.89.9
// dear imgui, v1.90.0
// (drawing and font code)
/*
@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ namespace IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE
#define STBTT_sqrt(x) ImSqrt(x)
#define STBTT_pow(x,y) ImPow(x,y)
#define STBTT_fabs(x) ImFabs(x)
#define STBTT_ifloor(x) ((int)ImFloorSigned(x))
#define STBTT_ifloor(x) ((int)ImFloor(x))
#define STBTT_iceil(x) ((int)ImCeil(x))
#define STBTT_STATIC
#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
@ -392,9 +392,9 @@ void ImDrawListSharedData::SetCircleTessellationMaxError(float max_error)
void ImDrawList::_ResetForNewFrame()
{
// Verify that the ImDrawCmd fields we want to memcmp() are contiguous in memory.
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, ClipRect) == 0);
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, TextureId) == sizeof(ImVec4));
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, VtxOffset) == sizeof(ImVec4) + sizeof(ImTextureID));
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(offsetof(ImDrawCmd, ClipRect) == 0);
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(offsetof(ImDrawCmd, TextureId) == sizeof(ImVec4));
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(offsetof(ImDrawCmd, VtxOffset) == sizeof(ImVec4) + sizeof(ImTextureID));
if (_Splitter._Count > 1)
_Splitter.Merge(this);
@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ void ImDrawList::AddCallback(ImDrawCallback callback, void* callback_data)
}
// Compare ClipRect, TextureId and VtxOffset with a single memcmp()
#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize (IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, VtxOffset) + sizeof(unsigned int))
#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize (offsetof(ImDrawCmd, VtxOffset) + sizeof(unsigned int))
#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(CMD_LHS, CMD_RHS) (memcmp(CMD_LHS, CMD_RHS, ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize)) // Compare ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset
#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderCopy(CMD_DST, CMD_SRC) (memcpy(CMD_DST, CMD_SRC, ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize)) // Copy ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset
#define ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset(CMD_0, CMD_1) (CMD_0->IdxOffset + CMD_0->ElemCount == CMD_1->IdxOffset)
@ -1197,8 +1197,8 @@ void ImDrawList::PathArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, floa
const float a_min_sample_f = IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX * a_min / (IM_PI * 2.0f);
const float a_max_sample_f = IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX * a_max / (IM_PI * 2.0f);
const int a_min_sample = a_is_reverse ? (int)ImFloorSigned(a_min_sample_f) : (int)ImCeil(a_min_sample_f);
const int a_max_sample = a_is_reverse ? (int)ImCeil(a_max_sample_f) : (int)ImFloorSigned(a_max_sample_f);
const int a_min_sample = a_is_reverse ? (int)ImFloor(a_min_sample_f) : (int)ImCeil(a_min_sample_f);
const int a_max_sample = a_is_reverse ? (int)ImCeil(a_max_sample_f) : (int)ImFloor(a_max_sample_f);
const int a_mid_samples = a_is_reverse ? ImMax(a_min_sample - a_max_sample, 0) : ImMax(a_max_sample - a_min_sample, 0);
const float a_min_segment_angle = a_min_sample * IM_PI * 2.0f / IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX;
@ -1223,6 +1223,27 @@ void ImDrawList::PathArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, floa
}
}
void ImDrawList::PathEllipticalArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius_x, float radius_y, float rot, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments)
{
if (num_segments <= 0)
num_segments = _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(ImMax(radius_x, radius_y)); // A bit pessimistic, maybe there's a better computation to do here.
_Path.reserve(_Path.Size + (num_segments + 1));
const float cos_rot = ImCos(rot);
const float sin_rot = ImSin(rot);
for (int i = 0; i <= num_segments; i++)
{
const float a = a_min + ((float)i / (float)num_segments) * (a_max - a_min);
ImVec2 point(ImCos(a) * radius_x, ImSin(a) * radius_y);
const float rel_x = (point.x * cos_rot) - (point.y * sin_rot);
const float rel_y = (point.x * sin_rot) + (point.y * cos_rot);
point.x = rel_x + center.x;
point.y = rel_y + center.y;
_Path.push_back(point);
}
}
ImVec2 ImBezierCubicCalc(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, float t)
{
float u = 1.0f - t;
@ -1318,33 +1339,22 @@ void ImDrawList::PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3,
}
}
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft == (1 << 4));
static inline ImDrawFlags FixRectCornerFlags(ImDrawFlags flags)
{
/*
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft == (1 << 4));
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
// Obsoleted in 1.82 (from February 2021)
// Legacy Support for hard coded ~0 (used to be a suggested equivalent to ImDrawCornerFlags_All)
// ~0 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll or 0
if (flags == ~0)
return ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll;
// Legacy Support for hard coded 0x01 to 0x0F (matching 15 out of 16 old flags combinations)
// 0x01 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft (VALUE 0x01 OVERLAPS ImDrawFlags_Closed but ImDrawFlags_Closed is never valid in this path!)
// 0x02 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight
// 0x03 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight
// 0x04 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBotLeft
// 0x05 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBotLeft
// ...
// 0x0F --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll or 0
// (See all values in ImDrawCornerFlags_)
if (flags >= 0x01 && flags <= 0x0F)
return (flags << 4);
// Obsoleted in 1.82 (from February 2021). This code was stripped/simplified and mostly commented in 1.90 (from September 2023)
// - Legacy Support for hard coded ~0 (used to be a suggested equivalent to ImDrawCornerFlags_All)
if (flags == ~0) { return ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll; }
// - Legacy Support for hard coded 0x01 to 0x0F (matching 15 out of 16 old flags combinations). Read details in older version of this code.
if (flags >= 0x01 && flags <= 0x0F) { return (flags << 4); }
// We cannot support hard coded 0x00 with 'float rounding > 0.0f' --> replace with ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone or use 'float rounding = 0.0f'
#endif
// If this triggers, please update your code replacing hardcoded values with new ImDrawFlags_RoundCorners* values.
// Note that ImDrawFlags_Closed (== 0x01) is an invalid flag for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect() etc...
*/
// If this assert triggers, please update your code replacing hardcoded values with new ImDrawFlags_RoundCorners* values.
// Note that ImDrawFlags_Closed (== 0x01) is an invalid flag for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect() etc. anyway.
// See details in 1.82 Changelog as well as 2021/03/12 and 2023/09/08 entries in "API BREAKING CHANGES" section.
IM_ASSERT((flags & 0x0F) == 0 && "Misuse of legacy hardcoded ImDrawCornerFlags values!");
if ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == 0)
@ -1553,6 +1563,35 @@ void ImDrawList::AddNgonFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, in
PathFillConvex(col);
}
// Ellipse
void ImDrawList::AddEllipse(const ImVec2& center, float radius_x, float radius_y, ImU32 col, float rot, int num_segments, float thickness)
{
if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
return;
if (num_segments <= 0)
num_segments = _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(ImMax(radius_x, radius_y)); // A bit pessimistic, maybe there's a better computation to do here.
// Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points
const float a_max = IM_PI * 2.0f * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments;
PathEllipticalArcTo(center, radius_x, radius_y, rot, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1);
PathStroke(col, true, thickness);
}
void ImDrawList::AddEllipseFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius_x, float radius_y, ImU32 col, float rot, int num_segments)
{
if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
return;
if (num_segments <= 0)
num_segments = _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(ImMax(radius_x, radius_y)); // A bit pessimistic, maybe there's a better computation to do here.
// Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points
const float a_max = IM_PI * 2.0f * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments;
PathEllipticalArcTo(center, radius_x, radius_y, rot, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1);
PathFillConvex(col);
}
// Cubic Bezier takes 4 controls points
void ImDrawList::AddBezierCubic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments)
{
@ -1956,6 +1995,14 @@ void ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int ve
}
}
void ImGui::ShadeVertsTransformPos(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, const ImVec2& pivot_in, float cos_a, float sin_a, const ImVec2& pivot_out)
{
ImDrawVert* vert_start = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_start_idx;
ImDrawVert* vert_end = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_end_idx;
for (ImDrawVert* vertex = vert_start; vertex < vert_end; ++vertex)
vertex->pos = ImRotate(vertex->pos- pivot_in, cos_a, sin_a) + pivot_out;
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] ImFontConfig
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -1968,6 +2015,7 @@ ImFontConfig::ImFontConfig()
OversampleV = 1;
GlyphMaxAdvanceX = FLT_MAX;
RasterizerMultiply = 1.0f;
RasterizerDensity = 1.0f;
EllipsisChar = (ImWchar)-1;
}
@ -2150,6 +2198,8 @@ ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFont(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg)
if (new_font_cfg.DstFont->EllipsisChar == (ImWchar)-1)
new_font_cfg.DstFont->EllipsisChar = font_cfg->EllipsisChar;
ImFontAtlasUpdateConfigDataPointers(this);
// Invalidate texture
TexReady = false;
ClearTexData();
@ -2186,7 +2236,7 @@ ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontDefault(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template)
if (font_cfg.Name[0] == '\0')
ImFormatString(font_cfg.Name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(font_cfg.Name), "ProggyClean.ttf, %dpx", (int)font_cfg.SizePixels);
font_cfg.EllipsisChar = (ImWchar)0x0085;
font_cfg.GlyphOffset.y = 1.0f * IM_FLOOR(font_cfg.SizePixels / 13.0f); // Add +1 offset per 13 units
font_cfg.GlyphOffset.y = 1.0f * IM_TRUNC(font_cfg.SizePixels / 13.0f); // Add +1 offset per 13 units
const char* ttf_compressed_base85 = GetDefaultCompressedFontDataTTFBase85();
const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = font_cfg.GlyphRanges != NULL ? font_cfg.GlyphRanges : GetGlyphRangesDefault();
@ -2216,13 +2266,14 @@ ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromFileTTF(const char* filename, float size_pixels,
}
// NB: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas, unless font_cfg_template->FontDataOwnedByAtlas == false. Owned TTF buffer will be deleted after Build().
ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* ttf_data, int ttf_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges)
ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* font_data, int font_data_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges)
{
IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!");
ImFontConfig font_cfg = font_cfg_template ? *font_cfg_template : ImFontConfig();
IM_ASSERT(font_cfg.FontData == NULL);
font_cfg.FontData = ttf_data;
font_cfg.FontDataSize = ttf_size;
IM_ASSERT(font_data_size > 100 && "Incorrect value for font_data_size!"); // Heuristic to prevent accidentally passing a wrong value to font_data_size.
font_cfg.FontData = font_data;
font_cfg.FontDataSize = font_data_size;
font_cfg.SizePixels = size_pixels > 0.0f ? size_pixels : font_cfg.SizePixels;
if (glyph_ranges)
font_cfg.GlyphRanges = glyph_ranges;
@ -2437,7 +2488,10 @@ static bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
const int font_offset = stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex((unsigned char*)cfg.FontData, cfg.FontNo);
IM_ASSERT(font_offset >= 0 && "FontData is incorrect, or FontNo cannot be found.");
if (!stbtt_InitFont(&src_tmp.FontInfo, (unsigned char*)cfg.FontData, font_offset))
{
IM_ASSERT(0 && "stbtt_InitFont(): failed to parse FontData. It is correct and complete? Check FontDataSize.");
return false;
}
// Measure highest codepoints
ImFontBuildDstData& dst_tmp = dst_tmp_array[src_tmp.DstIndex];
@ -2519,7 +2573,7 @@ static bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
// Convert our ranges in the format stb_truetype wants
ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
src_tmp.PackRange.font_size = cfg.SizePixels;
src_tmp.PackRange.font_size = cfg.SizePixels * cfg.RasterizerDensity;
src_tmp.PackRange.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range = 0;
src_tmp.PackRange.array_of_unicode_codepoints = src_tmp.GlyphsList.Data;
src_tmp.PackRange.num_chars = src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size;
@ -2528,7 +2582,7 @@ static bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
src_tmp.PackRange.v_oversample = (unsigned char)cfg.OversampleV;
// Gather the sizes of all rectangles we will need to pack (this loop is based on stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects)
const float scale = (cfg.SizePixels > 0) ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&src_tmp.FontInfo, cfg.SizePixels) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(&src_tmp.FontInfo, -cfg.SizePixels);
const float scale = (cfg.SizePixels > 0.0f) ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&src_tmp.FontInfo, cfg.SizePixels * cfg.RasterizerDensity) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(&src_tmp.FontInfo, -cfg.SizePixels * cfg.RasterizerDensity);
const int padding = atlas->TexGlyphPadding;
for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size; glyph_i++)
{
@ -2624,12 +2678,14 @@ static bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
int unscaled_ascent, unscaled_descent, unscaled_line_gap;
stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&src_tmp.FontInfo, &unscaled_ascent, &unscaled_descent, &unscaled_line_gap);
const float ascent = ImFloor(unscaled_ascent * font_scale + ((unscaled_ascent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1));
const float descent = ImFloor(unscaled_descent * font_scale + ((unscaled_descent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1));
const float ascent = ImTrunc(unscaled_ascent * font_scale + ((unscaled_ascent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1));
const float descent = ImTrunc(unscaled_descent * font_scale + ((unscaled_descent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1));
ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(atlas, dst_font, &cfg, ascent, descent);
const float font_off_x = cfg.GlyphOffset.x;
const float font_off_y = cfg.GlyphOffset.y + IM_ROUND(dst_font->Ascent);
const float inv_rasterization_scale = 1.0f / cfg.RasterizerDensity;
for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++)
{
// Register glyph
@ -2638,7 +2694,11 @@ static bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
stbtt_aligned_quad q;
float unused_x = 0.0f, unused_y = 0.0f;
stbtt_GetPackedQuad(src_tmp.PackedChars, atlas->TexWidth, atlas->TexHeight, glyph_i, &unused_x, &unused_y, &q, 0);
dst_font->AddGlyph(&cfg, (ImWchar)codepoint, q.x0 + font_off_x, q.y0 + font_off_y, q.x1 + font_off_x, q.y1 + font_off_y, q.s0, q.t0, q.s1, q.t1, pc.xadvance);
float x0 = q.x0 * inv_rasterization_scale + font_off_x;
float y0 = q.y0 * inv_rasterization_scale + font_off_y;
float x1 = q.x1 * inv_rasterization_scale + font_off_x;
float y1 = q.y1 * inv_rasterization_scale + font_off_y;
dst_font->AddGlyph(&cfg, (ImWchar)codepoint, x0, y0, x1, y1, q.s0, q.t0, q.s1, q.t1, pc.xadvance * inv_rasterization_scale);
}
}
@ -2658,19 +2718,31 @@ const ImFontBuilderIO* ImFontAtlasGetBuilderForStbTruetype()
#endif // IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE
void ImFontAtlasUpdateConfigDataPointers(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
{
for (ImFontConfig& font_cfg : atlas->ConfigData)
{
ImFont* font = font_cfg.DstFont;
if (!font_cfg.MergeMode)
{
font->ConfigData = &font_cfg;
font->ConfigDataCount = 0;
}
font->ConfigDataCount++;
}
}
void ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(ImFontAtlas* atlas, ImFont* font, ImFontConfig* font_config, float ascent, float descent)
{
if (!font_config->MergeMode)
{
font->ClearOutputData();
font->FontSize = font_config->SizePixels;
font->ConfigData = font_config;
font->ConfigDataCount = 0;
IM_ASSERT(font->ConfigData == font_config);
font->ContainerAtlas = atlas;
font->Ascent = ascent;
font->Descent = descent;
}
font->ConfigDataCount++;
}
void ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* stbrp_context_opaque)
@ -2817,6 +2889,13 @@ static void ImFontAtlasBuildRenderLinesTexData(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
// Note: this is called / shared by both the stb_truetype and the FreeType builder
void ImFontAtlasBuildInit(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
{
// Round font size
// - We started rounding in 1.90 WIP (18991) as our layout system currently doesn't support non-rounded font size well yet.
// - Note that using io.FontGlobalScale or SetWindowFontScale(), with are legacy-ish, partially supported features, can still lead to unrounded sizes.
// - We may support it better later and remove this rounding.
for (ImFontConfig& cfg : atlas->ConfigData)
cfg.SizePixels = ImTrunc(cfg.SizePixels);
// Register texture region for mouse cursors or standard white pixels
if (atlas->PackIdMouseCursors < 0)
{
@ -3225,6 +3304,7 @@ void ImFont::BuildLookupTable()
max_codepoint = ImMax(max_codepoint, (int)Glyphs[i].Codepoint);
// Build lookup table
IM_ASSERT(Glyphs.Size > 0 && "Font has not loaded glyph!");
IM_ASSERT(Glyphs.Size < 0xFFFF); // -1 is reserved
IndexAdvanceX.clear();
IndexLookup.clear();
@ -3341,7 +3421,7 @@ void ImFont::AddGlyph(const ImFontConfig* cfg, ImWchar codepoint, float x0, floa
advance_x = ImClamp(advance_x, cfg->GlyphMinAdvanceX, cfg->GlyphMaxAdvanceX);
if (advance_x != advance_x_original)
{
float char_off_x = cfg->PixelSnapH ? ImFloor((advance_x - advance_x_original) * 0.5f) : (advance_x - advance_x_original) * 0.5f;
float char_off_x = cfg->PixelSnapH ? ImTrunc((advance_x - advance_x_original) * 0.5f) : (advance_x - advance_x_original) * 0.5f;
x0 += char_off_x;
x1 += char_off_x;
}
@ -3609,8 +3689,8 @@ void ImFont::RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, Im
if (glyph->Colored)
col |= ~IM_COL32_A_MASK;
float scale = (size >= 0.0f) ? (size / FontSize) : 1.0f;
float x = IM_FLOOR(pos.x);
float y = IM_FLOOR(pos.y);
float x = IM_TRUNC(pos.x);
float y = IM_TRUNC(pos.y);
draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 4);
draw_list->PrimRectUV(ImVec2(x + glyph->X0 * scale, y + glyph->Y0 * scale), ImVec2(x + glyph->X1 * scale, y + glyph->Y1 * scale), ImVec2(glyph->U0, glyph->V0), ImVec2(glyph->U1, glyph->V1), col);
}
@ -3622,8 +3702,8 @@ void ImFont::RenderText(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, Im
text_end = text_begin + strlen(text_begin); // ImGui:: functions generally already provides a valid text_end, so this is merely to handle direct calls.
// Align to be pixel perfect
float x = IM_FLOOR(pos.x);
float y = IM_FLOOR(pos.y);
float x = IM_TRUNC(pos.x);
float y = IM_TRUNC(pos.y);
if (y > clip_rect.w)
return;

290
imgui/imgui_internal.h
View File

@ -1,12 +1,7 @@
// dear imgui, v1.89.9
// dear imgui, v1.90.0
// (internal structures/api)
// You may use this file to debug, understand or extend Dear ImGui features but we don't provide any guarantee of forward compatibility.
// To implement maths operators for ImVec2 (disabled by default to not conflict with using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA with your own math types+operators), use:
/*
#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
#include "imgui_internal.h"
*/
/*
@ -23,6 +18,7 @@ Index of this file:
// [SECTION] Inputs support
// [SECTION] Clipper support
// [SECTION] Navigation support
// [SECTION] Typing-select support
// [SECTION] Columns support
// [SECTION] Multi-select support
// [SECTION] Docking support
@ -81,7 +77,7 @@ Index of this file:
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
#endif
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal" // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants ok, for ImFloorSigned()
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal" // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants ok, for ImFloor()
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // for stb_textedit.h
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wmissing-prototypes" // for stb_textedit.h
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"
@ -157,6 +153,8 @@ struct ImGuiTableInstanceData; // Storage for one instance of a same table
struct ImGuiTableTempData; // Temporary storage for one table (one per table in the stack), shared between tables.
struct ImGuiTableSettings; // Storage for a table .ini settings
struct ImGuiTableColumnsSettings; // Storage for a column .ini settings
struct ImGuiTypingSelectState; // Storage for GetTypingSelectRequest()
struct ImGuiTypingSelectRequest; // Storage for GetTypingSelectRequest() (aimed to be public)
struct ImGuiWindow; // Storage for one window
struct ImGuiWindowTempData; // Temporary storage for one window (that's the data which in theory we could ditch at the end of the frame, in practice we currently keep it for each window)
struct ImGuiWindowSettings; // Storage for a window .ini settings (we keep one of those even if the actual window wasn't instanced during this session)
@ -183,6 +181,7 @@ typedef int ImGuiScrollFlags; // -> enum ImGuiScrollFlags_ // F
typedef int ImGuiSeparatorFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSeparatorFlags_ // Flags: for SeparatorEx()
typedef int ImGuiTextFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTextFlags_ // Flags: for TextEx()
typedef int ImGuiTooltipFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTooltipFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTooltipEx()
typedef int ImGuiTypingSelectFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_ // Flags: for GetTypingSelectRequest()
typedef void (*ImGuiErrorLogCallback)(void* user_data, const char* fmt, ...);
@ -277,10 +276,13 @@ namespace ImStb
#define IM_MEMALIGN(_OFF,_ALIGN) (((_OFF) + ((_ALIGN) - 1)) & ~((_ALIGN) - 1)) // Memory align e.g. IM_ALIGN(0,4)=0, IM_ALIGN(1,4)=4, IM_ALIGN(4,4)=4, IM_ALIGN(5,4)=8
#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(_VAL) ((int)((_VAL) * 255.0f + ((_VAL)>=0 ? 0.5f : -0.5f))) // Unsaturated, for display purpose
#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(_VAL) ((int)(ImSaturate(_VAL) * 255.0f + 0.5f)) // Saturated, always output 0..255
#define IM_FLOOR(_VAL) ((float)(int)(_VAL)) // ImFloor() is not inlined in MSVC debug builds
#define IM_TRUNC(_VAL) ((float)(int)(_VAL)) // ImTrunc() is not inlined in MSVC debug builds
#define IM_ROUND(_VAL) ((float)(int)((_VAL) + 0.5f)) //
#define IM_STRINGIFY_HELPER(_X) #_X
#define IM_STRINGIFY(_X) IM_STRINGIFY_HELPER(_X) // Preprocessor idiom to stringify e.g. an integer.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
#define IM_FLOOR IM_TRUNC
#endif
// Enforce cdecl calling convention for functions called by the standard library, in case compilation settings changed the default to e.g. __vectorcall
#ifdef _MSC_VER
@ -315,6 +317,18 @@ namespace ImStb
#endif
#endif // #ifndef IM_DEBUG_BREAK
// Format specifiers, printing 64-bit hasn't been decently standardized...
// In a real application you should be using PRId64 and PRIu64 from <inttypes.h> (non-windows) and on Windows define them yourself.
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__clang__)
#define IM_PRId64 "I64d"
#define IM_PRIu64 "I64u"
#define IM_PRIX64 "I64X"
#else
#define IM_PRId64 "lld"
#define IM_PRIu64 "llu"
#define IM_PRIX64 "llX"
#endif
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Generic helpers
// Note that the ImXXX helpers functions are lower-level than ImGui functions.
@ -358,18 +372,18 @@ static inline bool ImIsPowerOfTwo(ImU64 v) { return v != 0 && (v &
static inline int ImUpperPowerOfTwo(int v) { v--; v |= v >> 1; v |= v >> 2; v |= v >> 4; v |= v >> 8; v |= v >> 16; v++; return v; }
// Helpers: String
IMGUI_API int ImStricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2);
IMGUI_API int ImStrnicmp(const char* str1, const char* str2, size_t count);
IMGUI_API void ImStrncpy(char* dst, const char* src, size_t count);
IMGUI_API char* ImStrdup(const char* str);
IMGUI_API char* ImStrdupcpy(char* dst, size_t* p_dst_size, const char* str);
IMGUI_API const char* ImStrchrRange(const char* str_begin, const char* str_end, char c);
IMGUI_API int ImStrlenW(const ImWchar* str);
IMGUI_API int ImStricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2); // Case insensitive compare.
IMGUI_API int ImStrnicmp(const char* str1, const char* str2, size_t count); // Case insensitive compare to a certain count.
IMGUI_API void ImStrncpy(char* dst, const char* src, size_t count); // Copy to a certain count and always zero terminate (strncpy doesn't).
IMGUI_API char* ImStrdup(const char* str); // Duplicate a string.
IMGUI_API char* ImStrdupcpy(char* dst, size_t* p_dst_size, const char* str); // Copy in provided buffer, recreate buffer if needed.
IMGUI_API const char* ImStrchrRange(const char* str_begin, const char* str_end, char c); // Find first occurrence of 'c' in string range.
IMGUI_API const char* ImStreolRange(const char* str, const char* str_end); // End end-of-line
IMGUI_API const ImWchar*ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin); // Find beginning-of-line
IMGUI_API const char* ImStristr(const char* haystack, const char* haystack_end, const char* needle, const char* needle_end);
IMGUI_API void ImStrTrimBlanks(char* str);
IMGUI_API const char* ImStrSkipBlank(const char* str);
IMGUI_API const char* ImStristr(const char* haystack, const char* haystack_end, const char* needle, const char* needle_end); // Find a substring in a string range.
IMGUI_API void ImStrTrimBlanks(char* str); // Remove leading and trailing blanks from a buffer.
IMGUI_API const char* ImStrSkipBlank(const char* str); // Find first non-blank character.
IMGUI_API int ImStrlenW(const ImWchar* str); // Computer string length (ImWchar string)
IMGUI_API const ImWchar*ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin); // Find beginning-of-line (ImWchar string)
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
static inline char ImToUpper(char c) { return (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') ? c &= ~32 : c; }
static inline bool ImCharIsBlankA(char c) { return c == ' ' || c == '\t'; }
@ -396,6 +410,7 @@ IMGUI_API int ImTextStrFromUtf8(ImWchar* out_buf, int out_buf_size, co
IMGUI_API int ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end); // return number of UTF-8 code-points (NOT bytes count)
IMGUI_API int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end); // return number of bytes to express one char in UTF-8
IMGUI_API int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end); // return number of bytes to express string in UTF-8
IMGUI_API const char* ImTextFindPreviousUtf8Codepoint(const char* in_text_start, const char* in_text_curr); // return previous UTF-8 code-point.
// Helpers: File System
#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FILE_FUNCTIONS
@ -431,7 +446,6 @@ IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
#define ImAcos(X) acosf(X)
#define ImAtan2(Y, X) atan2f((Y), (X))
#define ImAtof(STR) atof(STR)
//#define ImFloorStd(X) floorf(X) // We use our own, see ImFloor() and ImFloorSigned()
#define ImCeil(X) ceilf(X)
static inline float ImPow(float x, float y) { return powf(x, y); } // DragBehaviorT/SliderBehaviorT uses ImPow with either float/double and need the precision
static inline double ImPow(double x, double y) { return pow(x, y); }
@ -469,10 +483,10 @@ static inline float ImSaturate(float f)
static inline float ImLengthSqr(const ImVec2& lhs) { return (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y); }
static inline float ImLengthSqr(const ImVec4& lhs) { return (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y) + (lhs.z * lhs.z) + (lhs.w * lhs.w); }
static inline float ImInvLength(const ImVec2& lhs, float fail_value) { float d = (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y); if (d > 0.0f) return ImRsqrt(d); return fail_value; }
static inline float ImFloor(float f) { return (float)(int)(f); }
static inline float ImFloorSigned(float f) { return (float)((f >= 0 || (float)(int)f == f) ? (int)f : (int)f - 1); } // Decent replacement for floorf()
static inline ImVec2 ImFloor(const ImVec2& v) { return ImVec2((float)(int)(v.x), (float)(int)(v.y)); }
static inline ImVec2 ImFloorSigned(const ImVec2& v) { return ImVec2(ImFloorSigned(v.x), ImFloorSigned(v.y)); }
static inline float ImTrunc(float f) { return (float)(int)(f); }
static inline ImVec2 ImTrunc(const ImVec2& v) { return ImVec2((float)(int)(v.x), (float)(int)(v.y)); }
static inline float ImFloor(float f) { return (float)((f >= 0 || (float)(int)f == f) ? (int)f : (int)f - 1); } // Decent replacement for floorf()
static inline ImVec2 ImFloor(const ImVec2& v) { return ImVec2(ImFloor(v.x), ImFloor(v.y)); }
static inline int ImModPositive(int a, int b) { return (a + b) % b; }
static inline float ImDot(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b) { return a.x * b.x + a.y * b.y; }
static inline ImVec2 ImRotate(const ImVec2& v, float cos_a, float sin_a) { return ImVec2(v.x * cos_a - v.y * sin_a, v.x * sin_a + v.y * cos_a); }
@ -535,6 +549,7 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImRect
ImVec2 GetBR() const { return Max; } // Bottom-right
bool Contains(const ImVec2& p) const { return p.x >= Min.x && p.y >= Min.y && p.x < Max.x && p.y < Max.y; }
bool Contains(const ImRect& r) const { return r.Min.x >= Min.x && r.Min.y >= Min.y && r.Max.x <= Max.x && r.Max.y <= Max.y; }
bool ContainsWithPad(const ImVec2& p, const ImVec2& pad) const { return p.x >= Min.x - pad.x && p.y >= Min.y - pad.y && p.x < Max.x + pad.x && p.y < Max.y + pad.y; }
bool Overlaps(const ImRect& r) const { return r.Min.y < Max.y && r.Max.y > Min.y && r.Min.x < Max.x && r.Max.x > Min.x; }
void Add(const ImVec2& p) { if (Min.x > p.x) Min.x = p.x; if (Min.y > p.y) Min.y = p.y; if (Max.x < p.x) Max.x = p.x; if (Max.y < p.y) Max.y = p.y; }
void Add(const ImRect& r) { if (Min.x > r.Min.x) Min.x = r.Min.x; if (Min.y > r.Min.y) Min.y = r.Min.y; if (Max.x < r.Max.x) Max.x = r.Max.x; if (Max.y < r.Max.y) Max.y = r.Max.y; }
@ -545,7 +560,7 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImRect
void TranslateY(float dy) { Min.y += dy; Max.y += dy; }
void ClipWith(const ImRect& r) { Min = ImMax(Min, r.Min); Max = ImMin(Max, r.Max); } // Simple version, may lead to an inverted rectangle, which is fine for Contains/Overlaps test but not for display.
void ClipWithFull(const ImRect& r) { Min = ImClamp(Min, r.Min, r.Max); Max = ImClamp(Max, r.Min, r.Max); } // Full version, ensure both points are fully clipped.
void Floor() { Min.x = IM_FLOOR(Min.x); Min.y = IM_FLOOR(Min.y); Max.x = IM_FLOOR(Max.x); Max.y = IM_FLOOR(Max.y); }
void Floor() { Min.x = IM_TRUNC(Min.x); Min.y = IM_TRUNC(Min.y); Max.x = IM_TRUNC(Max.x); Max.y = IM_TRUNC(Max.y); }
bool IsInverted() const { return Min.x > Max.x || Min.y > Max.y; }
ImVec4 ToVec4() const { return ImVec4(Min.x, Min.y, Max.x, Max.y); }
};
@ -710,7 +725,6 @@ struct ImChunkStream
int offset_from_ptr(const T* p) { IM_ASSERT(p >= begin() && p < end()); const ptrdiff_t off = (const char*)p - Buf.Data; return (int)off; }
T* ptr_from_offset(int off) { IM_ASSERT(off >= 4 && off < Buf.Size); return (T*)(void*)(Buf.Data + off); }
void swap(ImChunkStream<T>& rhs) { rhs.Buf.swap(Buf); }
};
// Helper: ImGuiTextIndex<>
@ -815,6 +829,7 @@ enum ImGuiItemFlags_
// Controlled by widget code
ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable = 1 << 10, // false // [WIP] Auto-activate input mode when tab focused. Currently only used and supported by a few items before it becomes a generic feature.
ImGuiItemFlags_HasSelectionUserData = 1 << 11, // false // Set by SetNextItemSelectionUserData()
};
// Status flags for an already submitted item
@ -1053,6 +1068,7 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiGroupData
ImGuiID WindowID;
ImVec2 BackupCursorPos;
ImVec2 BackupCursorMaxPos;
ImVec2 BackupCursorPosPrevLine;
ImVec1 BackupIndent;
ImVec1 BackupGroupOffset;
ImVec2 BackupCurrLineSize;
@ -1060,6 +1076,7 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiGroupData
ImGuiID BackupActiveIdIsAlive;
bool BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive;
bool BackupHoveredIdIsAlive;
bool BackupIsSameLine;
bool EmitItem;
};
@ -1154,9 +1171,10 @@ enum ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasFocus = 1 << 5,
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasBgAlpha = 1 << 6,
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasScroll = 1 << 7,
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasViewport = 1 << 8,
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasDock = 1 << 9,
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasWindowClass = 1 << 10,
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasChildFlags = 1 << 8,
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasViewport = 1 << 9,
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasDock = 1 << 10,
ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasWindowClass = 1 << 11,
};
// Storage for SetNexWindow** functions
@ -1172,6 +1190,7 @@ struct ImGuiNextWindowData
ImVec2 SizeVal;
ImVec2 ContentSizeVal;
ImVec2 ScrollVal;
ImGuiChildFlags ChildFlags;
bool PosUndock;
bool CollapsedVal;
ImRect SizeConstraintRect;
@ -1187,6 +1206,10 @@ struct ImGuiNextWindowData
inline void ClearFlags() { Flags = ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_None; }
};
// Multi-Selection item index or identifier when using SetNextItemSelectionUserData()/BeginMultiSelect()
// (Most users are likely to use this store an item INDEX but this may be used to store a POINTER as well.)
typedef ImS64 ImGuiSelectionUserData;
enum ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_
{
ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_None = 0,
@ -1197,13 +1220,14 @@ enum ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_
struct ImGuiNextItemData
{
ImGuiNextItemDataFlags Flags;
ImGuiItemFlags ItemFlags; // Currently only tested/used for ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap.
float Width; // Set by SetNextItemWidth()
ImGuiID FocusScopeId; // Set by SetNextItemMultiSelectData() (!= 0 signify value has been set, so it's an alternate version of HasSelectionData, we don't use Flags for this because they are cleared too early. This is mostly used for debugging)
ImGuiItemFlags ItemFlags; // Currently only tested/used for ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap.
// Non-flags members are NOT cleared by ItemAdd() meaning they are still valid during NavProcessItem()
float Width; // Set by SetNextItemWidth()
ImGuiSelectionUserData SelectionUserData; // Set by SetNextItemSelectionUserData() (note that NULL/0 is a valid value, we use -1 == ImGuiSelectionUserData_Invalid to mark invalid values)
ImGuiCond OpenCond;
bool OpenVal; // Set by SetNextItemOpen()
bool OpenVal; // Set by SetNextItemOpen()
ImGuiNextItemData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
ImGuiNextItemData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); SelectionUserData = -1; }
inline void ClearFlags() { Flags = ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_None; ItemFlags = ImGuiItemFlags_None; } // Also cleared manually by ItemAdd()!
};
@ -1250,9 +1274,9 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiStackSizes
// Data saved for each window pushed into the stack
struct ImGuiWindowStackData
{
ImGuiWindow* Window;
ImGuiLastItemData ParentLastItemDataBackup;
ImGuiStackSizes StackSizesOnBegin; // Store size of various stacks for asserting
ImGuiWindow* Window;
ImGuiLastItemData ParentLastItemDataBackup;
ImGuiStackSizes StackSizesOnBegin; // Store size of various stacks for asserting
};
struct ImGuiShrinkWidthItem
@ -1544,12 +1568,50 @@ struct ImGuiNavItemData
ImGuiID FocusScopeId; // Init,Move // Best candidate focus scope ID
ImRect RectRel; // Init,Move // Best candidate bounding box in window relative space
ImGuiItemFlags InFlags; // ????,Move // Best candidate item flags
ImGuiSelectionUserData SelectionUserData;//I+Mov // Best candidate SetNextItemSelectionData() value.
float DistBox; // Move // Best candidate box distance to current NavId
float DistCenter; // Move // Best candidate center distance to current NavId
float DistAxial; // Move // Best candidate axial distance to current NavId
ImGuiNavItemData() { Clear(); }
void Clear() { Window = NULL; ID = FocusScopeId = 0; InFlags = 0; DistBox = DistCenter = DistAxial = FLT_MAX; }
void Clear() { Window = NULL; ID = FocusScopeId = 0; InFlags = 0; SelectionUserData = -1; DistBox = DistCenter = DistAxial = FLT_MAX; }
};
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Typing-select support
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Flags for GetTypingSelectRequest()
enum ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_
{
ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_AllowBackspace = 1 << 0, // Backspace to delete character inputs. If using: ensure GetTypingSelectRequest() is not called more than once per frame (filter by e.g. focus state)
ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_AllowSingleCharMode = 1 << 1, // Allow "single char" search mode which is activated when pressing the same character multiple times.
};
// Returned by GetTypingSelectRequest(), designed to eventually be public.
struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTypingSelectRequest
{
ImGuiTypingSelectFlags Flags; // Flags passed to GetTypingSelectRequest()
int SearchBufferLen;
const char* SearchBuffer; // Search buffer contents (use full string. unless SingleCharMode is set, in which case use SingleCharSize).
bool SelectRequest; // Set when buffer was modified this frame, requesting a selection.
bool SingleCharMode; // Notify when buffer contains same character repeated, to implement special mode. In this situation it preferred to not display any on-screen search indication.
ImS8 SingleCharSize; // Length in bytes of first letter codepoint (1 for ascii, 2-4 for UTF-8). If (SearchBufferLen==RepeatCharSize) only 1 letter has been input.
};
// Storage for GetTypingSelectRequest()
struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTypingSelectState
{
ImGuiTypingSelectRequest Request; // User-facing data
char SearchBuffer[64]; // Search buffer: no need to make dynamic as this search is very transient.
ImGuiID FocusScope;
int LastRequestFrame = 0;
float LastRequestTime = 0.0f;
bool SingleCharModeLock = false; // After a certain single char repeat count we lock into SingleCharMode. Two benefits: 1) buffer never fill, 2) we can provide an immediate SingleChar mode without timer elapsing.
ImGuiTypingSelectState() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
void Clear() { SearchBuffer[0] = 0; SingleCharModeLock = false; } // We preserve remaining data for easier debugging
};
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -1612,6 +1674,9 @@ struct ImGuiOldColumns
// [SECTION] Multi-select support
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// We always assume that -1 is an invalid value (which works for indices and pointers)
#define ImGuiSelectionUserData_Invalid ((ImGuiSelectionUserData)-1)
#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_MULTI_SELECT
// <this is filled in 'range_select' branch>
#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_MULTI_SELECT
@ -1629,25 +1694,28 @@ struct ImGuiOldColumns
enum ImGuiDockNodeFlagsPrivate_
{
// [Internal]
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace = 1 << 10, // Local, Saved // A dockspace is a node that occupy space within an existing user window. Otherwise the node is floating and create its own window.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode = 1 << 11, // Local, Saved // The central node has 2 main properties: stay visible when empty, only use "remaining" spaces from its neighbor.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar = 1 << 12, // Local, Saved // Tab bar is completely unavailable. No triangle in the corner to enable it back.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar = 1 << 13, // Local, Saved // Tab bar is hidden, with a triangle in the corner to show it again (NB: actual tab-bar instance may be destroyed as this is only used for single-window tab bar)
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton = 1 << 14, // Local, Saved // Disable window/docking menu (that one that appears instead of the collapse button)
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton = 1 << 15, // Local, Saved //
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDocking = 1 << 16, // Local, Saved // Disable any form of docking in this dockspace or individual node. (On a whole dockspace, this pretty much defeat the purpose of using a dockspace at all). Note: when turned on, existing docked nodes will be preserved.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitMe = 1 << 17, // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent another window/node from splitting this node.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitOther = 1 << 18, // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent this node from splitting another window/node.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverMe = 1 << 19, // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent another window/node to be docked over this node.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverOther = 1 << 20, // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent this node to be docked over another window or non-empty node.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverEmpty = 1 << 21, // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent this node to be docked over an empty node (e.g. DockSpace with no other windows)
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeX = 1 << 22, // [EXPERIMENTAL]
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeY = 1 << 23, // [EXPERIMENTAL]
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace = 1 << 10, // Saved // A dockspace is a node that occupy space within an existing user window. Otherwise the node is floating and create its own window.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode = 1 << 11, // Saved // The central node has 2 main properties: stay visible when empty, only use "remaining" spaces from its neighbor.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar = 1 << 12, // Saved // Tab bar is completely unavailable. No triangle in the corner to enable it back.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar = 1 << 13, // Saved // Tab bar is hidden, with a triangle in the corner to show it again (NB: actual tab-bar instance may be destroyed as this is only used for single-window tab bar)
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton = 1 << 14, // Saved // Disable window/docking menu (that one that appears instead of the collapse button)
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton = 1 << 15, // Saved // Disable close button
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeX = 1 << 16, // //
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeY = 1 << 17, // //
// Disable docking/undocking actions in this dockspace or individual node (existing docked nodes will be preserved)
// Those are not exposed in public because the desirable sharing/inheriting/copy-flag-on-split behaviors are quite difficult to design and understand.
// The two public flags ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverCentralNode/ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplit don't have those issues.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitOther = 1 << 19, // // Disable this node from splitting other windows/nodes.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverMe = 1 << 20, // // Disable other windows/nodes from being docked over this node.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverOther = 1 << 21, // // Disable this node from being docked over another window or non-empty node.
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverEmpty = 1 << 22, // // Disable this node from being docked over an empty node (e.g. DockSpace with no other windows)
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDocking = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverMe | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverOther | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverEmpty | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplit | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitOther,
// Masks
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SharedFlagsInheritMask_ = ~0,
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeFlagsMask_ = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeX | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeY,
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsMask_ = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeFlagsMask_ | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDocking,
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsTransferMask_ = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsMask_ & ~ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace, // When splitting those flags are moved to the inheriting child, never duplicated
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SavedFlagsMask_ = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeFlagsMask_ | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDocking
// When splitting, those local flags are moved to the inheriting child, never duplicated
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsTransferMask_ = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplit | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeFlagsMask_ | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton,
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SavedFlagsMask_ = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeFlagsMask_ | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton,
};
// Store the source authority (dock node vs window) of a field
@ -1824,6 +1892,7 @@ struct ImGuiWindowSettings
ImGuiID ClassId; // ID of window class if specified
short DockOrder; // Order of the last time the window was visible within its DockNode. This is used to reorder windows that are reappearing on the same frame. Same value between windows that were active and windows that were none are possible.
bool Collapsed;
bool IsChild;
bool WantApply; // Set when loaded from .ini data (to enable merging/loading .ini data into an already running context)
bool WantDelete; // Set to invalidate/delete the settings entry
@ -1863,6 +1932,7 @@ enum ImGuiLocKey : int
ImGuiLocKey_WindowingUntitled,
ImGuiLocKey_DockingHideTabBar,
ImGuiLocKey_DockingHoldShiftToDock,
ImGuiLocKey_DockingDragToUndockOrMoveNode,
ImGuiLocKey_COUNT
};
@ -1892,12 +1962,30 @@ enum ImGuiDebugLogFlags_
ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventViewport = 1 << 8,
ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventMask_ = ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventActiveId | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventFocus | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventPopup | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventNav | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventClipper | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventSelection | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventIO | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventDocking | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventViewport,
ImGuiDebugLogFlags_OutputToTTY = 1 << 10, // Also send output to TTY
ImGuiDebugLogFlags_OutputToTestEngine = 1 << 11,// Also send output to Test Engine
};
struct ImGuiDebugAllocEntry
{
int FrameCount;
ImS16 AllocCount;
ImS16 FreeCount;
};
struct ImGuiDebugAllocInfo
{
int TotalAllocCount; // Number of call to MemAlloc().
int TotalFreeCount;
ImS16 LastEntriesIdx; // Current index in buffer
ImGuiDebugAllocEntry LastEntriesBuf[6]; // Track last 6 frames that had allocations
ImGuiDebugAllocInfo() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
};
struct ImGuiMetricsConfig
{
bool ShowDebugLog = false;
bool ShowStackTool = false;
bool ShowIDStackTool = false;
bool ShowWindowsRects = false;
bool ShowWindowsBeginOrder = false;
bool ShowTablesRects = false;
@ -1920,8 +2008,8 @@ struct ImGuiStackLevelInfo
ImGuiStackLevelInfo() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
};
// State for Stack tool queries
struct ImGuiStackTool
// State for ID Stack tool queries
struct ImGuiIDStackTool
{
int LastActiveFrame;
int StackLevel; // -1: query stack and resize Results, >= 0: individual stack level
@ -1930,7 +2018,7 @@ struct ImGuiStackTool
bool CopyToClipboardOnCtrlC;
float CopyToClipboardLastTime;
ImGuiStackTool() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); CopyToClipboardLastTime = -FLT_MAX; }
ImGuiIDStackTool() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); CopyToClipboardLastTime = -FLT_MAX; }
};
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -2001,12 +2089,13 @@ struct ImGuiContext
ImGuiWindow* WheelingWindow; // Track the window we started mouse-wheeling on. Until a timer elapse or mouse has moved, generally keep scrolling the same window even if during the course of scrolling the mouse ends up hovering a child window.
ImVec2 WheelingWindowRefMousePos;
int WheelingWindowStartFrame; // This may be set one frame before WheelingWindow is != NULL
int WheelingWindowScrolledFrame;
float WheelingWindowReleaseTimer;
ImVec2 WheelingWindowWheelRemainder;
ImVec2 WheelingAxisAvg;
// Item/widgets state and tracking information
ImGuiID DebugHookIdInfo; // Will call core hooks: DebugHookIdInfo() from GetID functions, used by Stack Tool [next HoveredId/ActiveId to not pull in an extra cache-line]
ImGuiID DebugHookIdInfo; // Will call core hooks: DebugHookIdInfo() from GetID functions, used by ID Stack Tool [next HoveredId/ActiveId to not pull in an extra cache-line]
ImGuiID HoveredId; // Hovered widget, filled during the frame
ImGuiID HoveredIdPreviousFrame;
bool HoveredIdAllowOverlap;
@ -2052,16 +2141,17 @@ struct ImGuiContext
ImGuiNextItemData NextItemData; // Storage for SetNextItem** functions
ImGuiLastItemData LastItemData; // Storage for last submitted item (setup by ItemAdd)
ImGuiNextWindowData NextWindowData; // Storage for SetNextWindow** functions
bool DebugShowGroupRects;
// Shared stacks
ImVector<ImGuiColorMod> ColorStack; // Stack for PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor() - inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiStyleMod> StyleVarStack; // Stack for PushStyleVar()/PopStyleVar() - inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImFont*> FontStack; // Stack for PushFont()/PopFont() - inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiID> FocusScopeStack; // Stack for PushFocusScope()/PopFocusScope() - inherited by BeginChild(), pushed into by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiItemFlags>ItemFlagsStack; // Stack for PushItemFlag()/PopItemFlag() - inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiGroupData>GroupStack; // Stack for BeginGroup()/EndGroup() - not inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiPopupData>OpenPopupStack; // Which popups are open (persistent)
ImVector<ImGuiPopupData>BeginPopupStack; // Which level of BeginPopup() we are in (reset every frame)
ImVector<ImGuiColorMod> ColorStack; // Stack for PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor() - inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiStyleMod> StyleVarStack; // Stack for PushStyleVar()/PopStyleVar() - inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImFont*> FontStack; // Stack for PushFont()/PopFont() - inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiID> FocusScopeStack; // Stack for PushFocusScope()/PopFocusScope() - inherited by BeginChild(), pushed into by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiItemFlags> ItemFlagsStack; // Stack for PushItemFlag()/PopItemFlag() - inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiGroupData> GroupStack; // Stack for BeginGroup()/EndGroup() - not inherited by Begin()
ImVector<ImGuiPopupData> OpenPopupStack; // Which popups are open (persistent)
ImVector<ImGuiPopupData> BeginPopupStack; // Which level of BeginPopup() we are in (reset every frame)
ImVector<ImGuiNavTreeNodeData> NavTreeNodeStack; // Stack for TreeNode() when a NavLeft requested is emitted.
int BeginMenuCount;
@ -2093,6 +2183,7 @@ struct ImGuiContext
ImGuiActivateFlags NavNextActivateFlags;
ImGuiInputSource NavInputSource; // Keyboard or Gamepad mode? THIS CAN ONLY BE ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard or ImGuiInputSource_Mouse
ImGuiNavLayer NavLayer; // Layer we are navigating on. For now the system is hard-coded for 0=main contents and 1=menu/title bar, may expose layers later.
ImGuiSelectionUserData NavLastValidSelectionUserData; // Last valid data passed to SetNextItemSelectionUser(), or -1. For current window. Not reset when focusing an item that doesn't have selection data.
bool NavIdIsAlive; // Nav widget has been seen this frame ~~ NavRectRel is valid
bool NavMousePosDirty; // When set we will update mouse position if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) if set (NB: this not enabled by default)
bool NavDisableHighlight; // When user starts using mouse, we hide gamepad/keyboard highlight (NB: but they are still available, which is why NavDisableHighlight isn't always != NavDisableMouseHover)
@ -2200,6 +2291,8 @@ struct ImGuiContext
ImU32 ColorEditSavedColor; // RGB value with alpha set to 0.
ImVec4 ColorPickerRef; // Initial/reference color at the time of opening the color picker.
ImGuiComboPreviewData ComboPreviewData;
ImRect WindowResizeBorderExpectedRect; // Expected border rect, switch to relative edit if moving
bool WindowResizeRelativeMode;
float SliderGrabClickOffset;
float SliderCurrentAccum; // Accumulated slider delta when using navigation controls.
bool SliderCurrentAccumDirty; // Has the accumulated slider delta changed since last time we tried to apply it?
@ -2213,6 +2306,7 @@ struct ImGuiContext
short TooltipOverrideCount;
ImVector<char> ClipboardHandlerData; // If no custom clipboard handler is defined
ImVector<ImGuiID> MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame; // A list of menu IDs that were rendered at least once
ImGuiTypingSelectState TypingSelectState; // State for GetTypingSelectRequest()
// Platform support
ImGuiPlatformImeData PlatformImeData; // Data updated by current frame
@ -2261,7 +2355,8 @@ struct ImGuiContext
ImU8 DebugItemPickerMouseButton;
ImGuiID DebugItemPickerBreakId; // Will call IM_DEBUG_BREAK() when encountering this ID
ImGuiMetricsConfig DebugMetricsConfig;
ImGuiStackTool DebugStackTool;
ImGuiIDStackTool DebugIDStackTool;
ImGuiDebugAllocInfo DebugAllocInfo;
ImGuiDockNode* DebugHoveredDockNode; // Hovered dock node.
// Misc
@ -2302,7 +2397,7 @@ struct ImGuiContext
HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow = NULL;
MovingWindow = NULL;
WheelingWindow = NULL;
WheelingWindowStartFrame = -1;
WheelingWindowStartFrame = WheelingWindowScrolledFrame = -1;
WheelingWindowReleaseTimer = 0.0f;
DebugHookIdInfo = 0;
@ -2338,6 +2433,7 @@ struct ImGuiContext
CurrentFocusScopeId = 0;
CurrentItemFlags = ImGuiItemFlags_None;
DebugShowGroupRects = false;
BeginMenuCount = 0;
CurrentDpiScale = 0.0f;
@ -2354,6 +2450,7 @@ struct ImGuiContext
NavJustMovedToKeyMods = ImGuiMod_None;
NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard;
NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
NavLastValidSelectionUserData = ImGuiSelectionUserData_Invalid;
NavIdIsAlive = false;
NavMousePosDirty = false;
NavDisableHighlight = true;
@ -2409,6 +2506,7 @@ struct ImGuiContext
ColorEditCurrentID = ColorEditSavedID = 0;
ColorEditSavedHue = ColorEditSavedSat = 0.0f;
ColorEditSavedColor = 0;
WindowResizeRelativeMode = false;
SliderGrabClickOffset = 0.0f;
SliderCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
SliderCurrentAccumDirty = false;
@ -2521,6 +2619,7 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow
char* Name; // Window name, owned by the window.
ImGuiID ID; // == ImHashStr(Name)
ImGuiWindowFlags Flags, FlagsPreviousFrame; // See enum ImGuiWindowFlags_
ImGuiChildFlags ChildFlags; // Set when window is a child window. See enum ImGuiChildFlags_
ImGuiWindowClass WindowClass; // Advanced users only. Set with SetNextWindowClass()
ImGuiViewportP* Viewport; // Always set in Begin(). Inactive windows may have a NULL value here if their viewport was discarded.
ImGuiID ViewportId; // We backup the viewport id (since the viewport may disappear or never be created if the window is inactive)
@ -2561,6 +2660,7 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow
bool IsFallbackWindow; // Set on the "Debug##Default" window.
bool IsExplicitChild; // Set when passed _ChildWindow, left to false by BeginDocked()
bool HasCloseButton; // Set when the window has a close button (p_open != NULL)
signed char ResizeBorderHovered; // Current border being hovered for resize (-1: none, otherwise 0-3)
signed char ResizeBorderHeld; // Current border being held for resize (-1: none, otherwise 0-3)
short BeginCount; // Number of Begin() during the current frame (generally 0 or 1, 1+ if appending via multiple Begin/End pairs)
short BeginCountPreviousFrame; // Number of Begin() during the previous frame
@ -2569,7 +2669,6 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow
short FocusOrder; // Order within WindowsFocusOrder[], altered when windows are focused.
ImGuiID PopupId; // ID in the popup stack when this window is used as a popup/menu (because we use generic Name/ID for recycling)
ImS8 AutoFitFramesX, AutoFitFramesY;
ImS8 AutoFitChildAxises;
bool AutoFitOnlyGrows;
ImGuiDir AutoPosLastDirection;
ImS8 HiddenFramesCanSkipItems; // Hide the window for N frames
@ -2678,7 +2777,6 @@ enum ImGuiTabItemFlagsPrivate_
ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton = 1 << 20, // Track whether p_open was set or not (we'll need this info on the next frame to recompute ContentWidth during layout)
ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button = 1 << 21, // Used by TabItemButton, change the tab item behavior to mimic a button
ImGuiTabItemFlags_Unsorted = 1 << 22, // [Docking] Trailing tabs with the _Unsorted flag will be sorted based on the DockOrder of their Window.
ImGuiTabItemFlags_Preview = 1 << 23, // [Docking] Display tab shape for docking preview (height is adjusted slightly to compensate for the yet missing tab bar)
};
// Storage for one active tab item (sizeof() 48 bytes)
@ -2723,6 +2821,8 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTabBar
float ScrollingSpeed;
float ScrollingRectMinX;
float ScrollingRectMaxX;
float SeparatorMinX;
float SeparatorMaxX;
ImGuiID ReorderRequestTabId;
ImS16 ReorderRequestOffset;
ImS8 BeginCount;
@ -2820,16 +2920,17 @@ struct ImGuiTableCellData
};
// Per-instance data that needs preserving across frames (seemingly most others do not need to be preserved aside from debug needs. Does that means they could be moved to ImGuiTableTempData?)
// sizeof() ~ 24 bytes
struct ImGuiTableInstanceData
{
ImGuiID TableInstanceID;
float LastOuterHeight; // Outer height from last frame
float LastFirstRowHeight; // Height of first row from last frame (FIXME: this is used as "header height" and may be reworked)
float LastTopHeadersRowHeight; // Height of first consecutive header rows from last frame (FIXME: this is used assuming consecutive headers are in same frozen set)
float LastFrozenHeight; // Height of frozen section from last frame
int HoveredRowLast; // Index of row which was hovered last frame.
int HoveredRowNext; // Index of row hovered this frame, set after encountering it.
ImGuiTableInstanceData() { TableInstanceID = 0; LastOuterHeight = LastFirstRowHeight = LastFrozenHeight = 0.0f; HoveredRowLast = HoveredRowNext = -1; }
ImGuiTableInstanceData() { TableInstanceID = 0; LastOuterHeight = LastTopHeadersRowHeight = LastFrozenHeight = 0.0f; HoveredRowLast = HoveredRowNext = -1; }
};
// FIXME-TABLE: more transient data could be stored in a stacked ImGuiTableTempData: e.g. SortSpecs, incoming RowData
@ -2881,6 +2982,8 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTable
float ResizedColumnNextWidth;
float ResizeLockMinContentsX2; // Lock minimum contents width while resizing down in order to not create feedback loops. But we allow growing the table.
float RefScale; // Reference scale to be able to rescale columns on font/dpi changes.
float AngledHeadersHeight; // Set by TableAngledHeadersRow(), used in TableUpdateLayout()
float AngledHeadersSlope; // Set by TableAngledHeadersRow(), used in TableUpdateLayout()
ImRect OuterRect; // Note: for non-scrolling table, OuterRect.Max.y is often FLT_MAX until EndTable(), unless a height has been specified in BeginTable().
ImRect InnerRect; // InnerRect but without decoration. As with OuterRect, for non-scrolling tables, InnerRect.Max.y is
ImRect WorkRect;
@ -2903,8 +3006,10 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTable
ImGuiTableColumnIdx ColumnsEnabledCount; // Number of enabled columns (<= ColumnsCount)
ImGuiTableColumnIdx ColumnsEnabledFixedCount; // Number of enabled columns (<= ColumnsCount)
ImGuiTableColumnIdx DeclColumnsCount; // Count calls to TableSetupColumn()
ImGuiTableColumnIdx AngledHeadersCount; // Count columns with angled headers
ImGuiTableColumnIdx HoveredColumnBody; // Index of column whose visible region is being hovered. Important: == ColumnsCount when hovering empty region after the right-most column!
ImGuiTableColumnIdx HoveredColumnBorder; // Index of column whose right-border is being hovered (for resizing).
ImGuiTableColumnIdx HighlightColumnHeader; // Index of column which should be highlighted.
ImGuiTableColumnIdx AutoFitSingleColumn; // Index of single column requesting auto-fit.
ImGuiTableColumnIdx ResizedColumn; // Index of column being resized. Reset when InstanceCurrent==0.
ImGuiTableColumnIdx LastResizedColumn; // Index of column being resized from previous frame.
@ -2930,6 +3035,7 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTable
bool IsSortSpecsDirty;
bool IsUsingHeaders; // Set when the first row had the ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers flag.
bool IsContextPopupOpen; // Set when default context menu is open (also see: ContextPopupColumn, InstanceInteracted).
bool DisableDefaultContextMenu; // Disable default context menu contents. You may submit your own using TableBeginContextMenuPopup()/EndPopup()
bool IsSettingsRequestLoad;
bool IsSettingsDirty; // Set when table settings have changed and needs to be reported into ImGuiTableSetttings data.
bool IsDefaultDisplayOrder; // Set when display order is unchanged from default (DisplayOrder contains 0...Count-1)
@ -2937,6 +3043,8 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTable
bool IsResetDisplayOrderRequest;
bool IsUnfrozenRows; // Set when we got past the frozen row.
bool IsDefaultSizingPolicy; // Set if user didn't explicitly set a sizing policy in BeginTable()
bool IsActiveIdAliveBeforeTable;
bool IsActiveIdInTable;
bool HasScrollbarYCurr; // Whether ANY instance of this table had a vertical scrollbar during the current frame.
bool HasScrollbarYPrev; // Whether ANY instance of this table had a vertical scrollbar during the previous.
bool MemoryCompacted;
@ -2949,11 +3057,12 @@ struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTable
// Transient data that are only needed between BeginTable() and EndTable(), those buffers are shared (1 per level of stacked table).
// - Accessing those requires chasing an extra pointer so for very frequently used data we leave them in the main table structure.
// - We also leave out of this structure data that tend to be particularly useful for debugging/metrics.
// sizeof() ~ 112 bytes.
// sizeof() ~ 120 bytes.
struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTableTempData
{
int TableIndex; // Index in g.Tables.Buf[] pool
float LastTimeActive; // Last timestamp this structure was used
float AngledheadersExtraWidth; // Used in EndTable()
ImVec2 UserOuterSize; // outer_size.x passed to BeginTable()
ImDrawListSplitter DrawSplitter;
@ -3063,7 +3172,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void UpdateInputEvents(bool trickle_fast_inputs);
IMGUI_API void UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags();
IMGUI_API void StartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
IMGUI_API void StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiDockNode* node, bool undock_floating_node);
IMGUI_API void StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiDockNode* node, bool undock);
IMGUI_API void UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame();
IMGUI_API void UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame();
@ -3156,7 +3265,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void LogSetNextTextDecoration(const char* prefix, const char* suffix);
// Popups, Modals, Tooltips
IMGUI_API bool BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags);
IMGUI_API bool BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiChildFlags child_flags, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags);
IMGUI_API void OpenPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = ImGuiPopupFlags_None);
IMGUI_API void ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup);
IMGUI_API void ClosePopupsOverWindow(ImGuiWindow* ref_window, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup);
@ -3164,6 +3273,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API bool IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags);
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags);
IMGUI_API bool BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags tooltip_flags, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_window_flags);
IMGUI_API bool BeginTooltipHidden();
IMGUI_API ImRect GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(ImGuiWindow* window);
IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* GetTopMostPopupModal();
IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* GetTopMostAndVisiblePopupModal();
@ -3193,6 +3303,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestApplyResult();
IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags);
IMGUI_API void NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis axis);
IMGUI_API void NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
IMGUI_API void NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX();
IMGUI_API void SetNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
IMGUI_API void SetNavID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavLayer nav_layer, ImGuiID focus_scope_id, const ImRect& rect_rel);
@ -3233,6 +3344,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API float GetNavTweakPressedAmount(ImGuiAxis axis);
IMGUI_API int CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(float t0, float t1, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate);
IMGUI_API void GetTypematicRepeatRate(ImGuiInputFlags flags, float* repeat_delay, float* repeat_rate);
IMGUI_API void TeleportMousePos(const ImVec2& pos);
IMGUI_API void SetActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys();
inline bool IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir dir) { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return (g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask & (1 << dir)) != 0; }
@ -3266,6 +3378,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id);
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id);
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id);
// [EXPERIMENTAL] Shortcut Routing
// - ImGuiKeyChord = a ImGuiKey optionally OR-red with ImGuiMod_Alt/ImGuiMod_Ctrl/ImGuiMod_Shift/ImGuiMod_Super.
@ -3277,6 +3390,10 @@ namespace ImGui
// - Route is granted to a single owner. When multiple requests are made we have policies to select the winning route.
// - Multiple read sites may use the same owner id and will all get the granted route.
// - For routing: when owner_id is 0 we use the current Focus Scope ID as a default owner in order to identify our location.
// - TL;DR;
// - IsKeyChordPressed() compares mods + call IsKeyPressed() -> function has no side-effect.
// - Shortcut() submits a route then if currently can be routed calls IsKeyChordPressed() -> function has (desirable) side-effects.
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyChordPressed(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool Shortcut(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id = 0, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool SetShortcutRouting(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id = 0, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool TestShortcutRouting(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id);
@ -3356,6 +3473,12 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API bool IsDragDropPayloadBeingAccepted();
IMGUI_API void RenderDragDropTargetRect(const ImRect& bb);
// Typing-Select API
IMGUI_API ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* GetTypingSelectRequest(ImGuiTypingSelectFlags flags = ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_None);
IMGUI_API int TypingSelectFindMatch(ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* req, int items_count, const char* (*get_item_name_func)(void*, int), void* user_data, int nav_item_idx);
IMGUI_API int TypingSelectFindNextSingleCharMatch(ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* req, int items_count, const char* (*get_item_name_func)(void*, int), void* user_data, int nav_item_idx);
IMGUI_API int TypingSelectFindBestLeadingMatch(ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* req, int items_count, const char* (*get_item_name_func)(void*, int), void* user_data);
// Internal Columns API (this is not exposed because we will encourage transitioning to the Tables API)
IMGUI_API void SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& clip_rect);
IMGUI_API void BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int count, ImGuiOldColumnFlags flags = 0); // setup number of columns. use an identifier to distinguish multiple column sets. close with EndColumns().
@ -3375,8 +3498,10 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API int TableGetHoveredColumn(); // May use (TableGetColumnFlags() & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered) instead. Return hovered column. return -1 when table is not hovered. return columns_count if the unused space at the right of visible columns is hovered.
IMGUI_API int TableGetHoveredRow(); // Retrieve *PREVIOUS FRAME* hovered row. This difference with TableGetHoveredColumn() is the reason why this is not public yet.
IMGUI_API float TableGetHeaderRowHeight();
IMGUI_API float TableGetHeaderAngledMaxLabelWidth();
IMGUI_API void TablePushBackgroundChannel();
IMGUI_API void TablePopBackgroundChannel();
IMGUI_API void TableAngledHeadersRowEx(float angle, float label_width = 0.0f);
// Tables: Internals
inline ImGuiTable* GetCurrentTable() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentTable; }
@ -3389,7 +3514,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void TableUpdateBorders(ImGuiTable* table);
IMGUI_API void TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth(ImGuiTable* table);
IMGUI_API void TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table);
IMGUI_API void TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table);
IMGUI_API void TableDrawDefaultContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableFlags flags_for_section_to_display);
IMGUI_API bool TableBeginContextMenuPopup(ImGuiTable* table);
IMGUI_API void TableMergeDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table);
inline ImGuiTableInstanceData* TableGetInstanceData(ImGuiTable* table, int instance_no) { if (instance_no == 0) return &table->InstanceDataFirst; return &table->InstanceDataExtra[instance_no - 1]; }
@ -3425,7 +3550,7 @@ namespace ImGui
// Tab Bars
inline ImGuiTabBar* GetCurrentTabBar() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentTabBar; }
IMGUI_API bool BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags, ImGuiDockNode* dock_node);
IMGUI_API bool BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags);
IMGUI_API ImGuiTabItem* TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id);
IMGUI_API ImGuiTabItem* TabBarFindTabByOrder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, int order);
IMGUI_API ImGuiTabItem* TabBarFindMostRecentlySelectedTabForActiveWindow(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
@ -3474,7 +3599,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void TextEx(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, ImGuiTextFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool ButtonEx(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool ArrowButtonEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& image_size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API void SeparatorEx(ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags, float thickness = 1.0f);
IMGUI_API void SeparatorTextEx(ImGuiID id, const char* label, const char* label_end, float extra_width);
IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char* label, ImS64* flags, ImS64 flags_value);
@ -3499,6 +3624,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void TreePushOverrideID(ImGuiID id);
IMGUI_API void TreeNodeSetOpen(ImGuiID id, bool open);
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags); // Return open state. Consume previous SetNextItemOpen() data, if any. May return true when logging.
IMGUI_API void SetNextItemSelectionUserData(ImGuiSelectionUserData selection_user_data);
// Template functions are instantiated in imgui_widgets.cpp for a finite number of types.
// To use them externally (for custom widget) you may need an "extern template" statement in your code in order to link to existing instances and silence Clang warnings (see #2036).
@ -3537,6 +3663,7 @@ namespace ImGui
// Shade functions (write over already created vertices)
IMGUI_API void ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, ImVec2 gradient_p0, ImVec2 gradient_p1, ImU32 col0, ImU32 col1);
IMGUI_API void ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, bool clamp);
IMGUI_API void ShadeVertsTransformPos(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, const ImVec2& pivot_in, float cos_a, float sin_a, const ImVec2& pivot_out);
// Garbage collection
IMGUI_API void GcCompactTransientMiscBuffers();
@ -3546,6 +3673,7 @@ namespace ImGui
// Debug Log
IMGUI_API void DebugLog(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1);
IMGUI_API void DebugLogV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
IMGUI_API void DebugAllocHook(ImGuiDebugAllocInfo* info, int frame_count, void* ptr, size_t size); // size >= 0 : alloc, size = -1 : free
// Debug Tools
IMGUI_API void ErrorCheckEndFrameRecover(ImGuiErrorLogCallback log_callback, void* user_data = NULL);
@ -3571,6 +3699,7 @@ namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API void DebugNodeTable(ImGuiTable* table);
IMGUI_API void DebugNodeTableSettings(ImGuiTableSettings* settings);
IMGUI_API void DebugNodeInputTextState(ImGuiInputTextState* state);
IMGUI_API void DebugNodeTypingSelectState(ImGuiTypingSelectState* state);
IMGUI_API void DebugNodeWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, const char* label);
IMGUI_API void DebugNodeWindowSettings(ImGuiWindowSettings* settings);
IMGUI_API void DebugNodeWindowsList(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* windows, const char* label);
@ -3613,6 +3742,7 @@ struct ImFontBuilderIO
#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE
IMGUI_API const ImFontBuilderIO* ImFontAtlasGetBuilderForStbTruetype();
#endif
IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasUpdateConfigDataPointers(ImFontAtlas* atlas);
IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildInit(ImFontAtlas* atlas);
IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(ImFontAtlas* atlas, ImFont* font, ImFontConfig* font_config, float ascent, float descent);
IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* stbrp_context_opaque);

373
imgui/imgui_tables.cpp
View File

@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
// dear imgui, v1.89.9
// dear imgui, v1.90.0
// (tables and columns code)
/*
@ -48,7 +48,8 @@ Index of this file:
// - TableUpdateLayout() [Internal] followup to BeginTable(): setup everything: widths, columns positions, clipping rectangles. Automatically called by the FIRST call to TableNextRow() or TableHeadersRow().
// | TableSetupDrawChannels() - setup ImDrawList channels
// | TableUpdateBorders() - detect hovering columns for resize, ahead of contents submission
// | TableDrawContextMenu() - draw right-click context menu
// | TableBeginContextMenuPopup()
// | - TableDrawDefaultContextMenu() - draw right-click context menu contents
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - TableHeadersRow() or TableHeader() user submit a headers row (optional)
// | TableSortSpecsClickColumn() - when left-clicked: alter sort order and sort direction
@ -319,9 +320,10 @@ bool ImGui::BeginTableEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, ImG
// If an outer size is specified ahead we will be able to early out when not visible. Exact clipping criteria may evolve.
const bool use_child_window = (flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY)) != 0;
const ImVec2 avail_size = GetContentRegionAvail();
ImVec2 actual_outer_size = CalcItemSize(outer_size, ImMax(avail_size.x, 1.0f), use_child_window ? ImMax(avail_size.y, 1.0f) : 0.0f);
ImRect outer_rect(outer_window->DC.CursorPos, outer_window->DC.CursorPos + actual_outer_size);
if (use_child_window && IsClippedEx(outer_rect, 0))
const ImVec2 actual_outer_size = CalcItemSize(outer_size, ImMax(avail_size.x, 1.0f), use_child_window ? ImMax(avail_size.y, 1.0f) : 0.0f);
const ImRect outer_rect(outer_window->DC.CursorPos, outer_window->DC.CursorPos + actual_outer_size);
const bool outer_window_is_measuring_size = (outer_window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) || (outer_window->AutoFitFramesY > 0); // Doesn't apply to AlwaysAutoResize windows!
if (use_child_window && IsClippedEx(outer_rect, 0) && !outer_window_is_measuring_size)
{
ItemSize(outer_rect);
return false;
@ -345,7 +347,8 @@ bool ImGui::BeginTableEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, ImG
flags = TableFixFlags(flags, outer_window);
// Initialize
const int instance_no = (table->LastFrameActive != g.FrameCount) ? 0 : table->InstanceCurrent + 1;
const int previous_frame_active = table->LastFrameActive;
const int instance_no = (previous_frame_active != g.FrameCount) ? 0 : table->InstanceCurrent + 1;
table->ID = id;
table->Flags = flags;
table->LastFrameActive = g.FrameCount;
@ -404,6 +407,10 @@ bool ImGui::BeginTableEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, ImG
table->InnerRect = table->InnerWindow->InnerRect;
IM_ASSERT(table->InnerWindow->WindowPadding.x == 0.0f && table->InnerWindow->WindowPadding.y == 0.0f && table->InnerWindow->WindowBorderSize == 0.0f);
// Allow submitting when host is measuring
if (table->InnerWindow->SkipItems && outer_window_is_measuring_size)
table->InnerWindow->SkipItems = false;
// When using multiple instances, ensure they have the same amount of horizontal decorations (aka vertical scrollbar) so stretched columns can be aligned)
if (instance_no == 0)
{
@ -439,6 +446,18 @@ bool ImGui::BeginTableEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, ImG
temp_data->HostBackupItemWidthStackSize = outer_window->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size;
inner_window->DC.PrevLineSize = inner_window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
// Make left and top borders not overlap our contents by offsetting HostClipRect (#6765)
// (we normally shouldn't alter HostClipRect as we rely on TableMergeDrawChannels() expanding non-clipped column toward the
// limits of that rectangle, in order for ImDrawListSplitter::Merge() to merge the draw commands. However since the overlap
// problem only affect scrolling tables in this case we can get away with doing it without extra cost).
if (inner_window != outer_window)
{
if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV)
table->HostClipRect.Min.x = ImMin(table->HostClipRect.Min.x + TABLE_BORDER_SIZE, table->HostClipRect.Max.x);
if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH)
table->HostClipRect.Min.y = ImMin(table->HostClipRect.Min.y + TABLE_BORDER_SIZE, table->HostClipRect.Max.y);
}
// Padding and Spacing
// - None ........Content..... Pad .....Content........
// - PadOuter | Pad ..Content..... Pad .....Content.. Pad |
@ -472,7 +491,10 @@ bool ImGui::BeginTableEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, ImG
table->FreezeRowsRequest = table->FreezeRowsCount = 0; // This will be setup by TableSetupScrollFreeze(), if any
table->FreezeColumnsRequest = table->FreezeColumnsCount = 0;
table->IsUnfrozenRows = true;
table->DeclColumnsCount = 0;
table->DeclColumnsCount = table->AngledHeadersCount = 0;
if (previous_frame_active + 1 < g.FrameCount)
table->IsActiveIdInTable = false;
temp_data->AngledheadersExtraWidth = 0.0f;
// Using opaque colors facilitate overlapping lines of the grid, otherwise we'd need to improve TableDrawBorders()
table->BorderColorStrong = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong);
@ -846,8 +868,8 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
table->RightMostEnabledColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)prev_visible_column_idx;
IM_ASSERT(table->LeftMostEnabledColumn >= 0 && table->RightMostEnabledColumn >= 0);
// [Part 2] Disable child window clipping while fitting columns. This is not strictly necessary but makes it possible
// to avoid the column fitting having to wait until the first visible frame of the child container (may or not be a good thing).
// [Part 2] Disable child window clipping while fitting columns. This is not strictly necessary but makes it possible to avoid
// the column fitting having to wait until the first visible frame of the child container (may or not be a good thing). Also see #6510.
// FIXME-TABLE: for always auto-resizing columns may not want to do that all the time.
if (has_auto_fit_request && table->OuterWindow != table->InnerWindow)
table->InnerWindow->SkipItems = false;
@ -932,7 +954,7 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)
{
float weight_ratio = column->StretchWeight / stretch_sum_weights;
column->WidthRequest = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(width_avail_for_stretched_columns * weight_ratio, table->MinColumnWidth) + 0.01f);
column->WidthRequest = IM_TRUNC(ImMax(width_avail_for_stretched_columns * weight_ratio, table->MinColumnWidth) + 0.01f);
width_remaining_for_stretched_columns -= column->WidthRequest;
}
@ -942,7 +964,7 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_;
// Assign final width, record width in case we will need to shrink
column->WidthGiven = ImFloor(ImMax(column->WidthRequest, table->MinColumnWidth));
column->WidthGiven = ImTrunc(ImMax(column->WidthRequest, table->MinColumnWidth));
table->ColumnsGivenWidth += column->WidthGiven;
}
@ -969,17 +991,23 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent);
table_instance->HoveredRowLast = table_instance->HoveredRowNext;
table_instance->HoveredRowNext = -1;
table->HoveredColumnBody = -1;
table->HoveredColumnBorder = -1;
table->HoveredColumnBody = table->HoveredColumnBorder = -1;
const ImRect mouse_hit_rect(table->OuterRect.Min.x, table->OuterRect.Min.y, table->OuterRect.Max.x, ImMax(table->OuterRect.Max.y, table->OuterRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastOuterHeight));
const ImGuiID backup_active_id = g.ActiveId;
g.ActiveId = 0;
const bool is_hovering_table = ItemHoverable(mouse_hit_rect, 0, ImGuiItemFlags_None);
g.ActiveId = backup_active_id;
// Determine skewed MousePos.x to support angled headers.
float mouse_skewed_x = g.IO.MousePos.x;
if (table->AngledHeadersHeight > 0.0f)
if (g.IO.MousePos.y >= table->OuterRect.Min.y && g.IO.MousePos.y <= table->OuterRect.Min.y + table->AngledHeadersHeight)
mouse_skewed_x += ImTrunc((table->OuterRect.Min.y + table->AngledHeadersHeight - g.IO.MousePos.y) * table->AngledHeadersSlope);
// [Part 6] Setup final position, offset, skip/clip states and clipping rectangles, detect hovered column
// Process columns in their visible orders as we are comparing the visible order and adjusting host_clip_rect while looping.
int visible_n = 0;
bool has_at_least_one_column_requesting_output = false;
bool offset_x_frozen = (table->FreezeColumnsCount > 0);
float offset_x = ((table->FreezeColumnsCount > 0) ? table->OuterRect.Min.x : work_rect.Min.x) + table->OuterPaddingX - table->CellSpacingX1;
ImRect host_clip_rect = table->InnerClipRect;
@ -1017,7 +1045,7 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
}
// Detect hovered column
if (is_hovering_table && g.IO.MousePos.x >= column->ClipRect.Min.x && g.IO.MousePos.x < column->ClipRect.Max.x)
if (is_hovering_table && mouse_skewed_x >= column->ClipRect.Min.x && mouse_skewed_x < column->ClipRect.Max.x)
table->HoveredColumnBody = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
// Lock start position
@ -1036,7 +1064,7 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
// - FIXME-TABLE: We want equal width columns to have equal (ClipRect.Max.x - WorkMinX) width, which means ClipRect.max.x cannot stray off host_clip_rect.Max.x else right-most column may appear shorter.
column->WorkMinX = column->MinX + table->CellPaddingX + table->CellSpacingX1;
column->WorkMaxX = column->MaxX - table->CellPaddingX - table->CellSpacingX2; // Expected max
column->ItemWidth = ImFloor(column->WidthGiven * 0.65f);
column->ItemWidth = ImTrunc(column->WidthGiven * 0.65f);
column->ClipRect.Min.x = column->MinX;
column->ClipRect.Min.y = work_rect.Min.y;
column->ClipRect.Max.x = column->MaxX; //column->WorkMaxX;
@ -1060,9 +1088,12 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
column->IsRequestOutput = is_visible || column->AutoFitQueue != 0 || column->CannotSkipItemsQueue != 0;
// Mark column as SkipItems (ignoring all items/layout)
// (table->HostSkipItems is a copy of inner_window->SkipItems before we cleared it above in Part 2)
column->IsSkipItems = !column->IsEnabled || table->HostSkipItems;
if (column->IsSkipItems)
IM_ASSERT(!is_visible);
if (column->IsRequestOutput && !column->IsSkipItems)
has_at_least_one_column_requesting_output = true;
// Update status flags
column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled;
@ -1100,18 +1131,26 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
visible_n++;
}
// In case the table is visible (e.g. decorations) but all columns clipped, we keep a column visible.
// Else if give no chance to a clipper-savy user to submit rows and therefore total contents height used by scrollbar.
if (has_at_least_one_column_requesting_output == false)
{
table->Columns[table->LeftMostEnabledColumn].IsRequestOutput = true;
table->Columns[table->LeftMostEnabledColumn].IsSkipItems = false;
}
// [Part 7] Detect/store when we are hovering the unused space after the right-most column (so e.g. context menus can react on it)
// Clear Resizable flag if none of our column are actually resizable (either via an explicit _NoResize flag, either
// because of using _WidthAuto/_WidthStretch). This will hide the resizing option from the context menu.
const float unused_x1 = ImMax(table->WorkRect.Min.x, table->Columns[table->RightMostEnabledColumn].ClipRect.Max.x);
if (is_hovering_table && table->HoveredColumnBody == -1)
{
if (g.IO.MousePos.x >= unused_x1)
if (mouse_skewed_x >= unused_x1)
table->HoveredColumnBody = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)table->ColumnsCount;
}
if (has_resizable == false && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable))
table->Flags &= ~ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable;
table->IsActiveIdAliveBeforeTable = (g.ActiveIdIsAlive != 0);
// [Part 8] Lock actual OuterRect/WorkRect right-most position.
// This is done late to handle the case of fixed-columns tables not claiming more widths that they need.
// Because of this we are careful with uses of WorkRect and InnerClipRect before this point.
@ -1123,8 +1162,8 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
table->InnerClipRect.Max.x = ImMin(table->InnerClipRect.Max.x, unused_x1);
}
table->InnerWindow->ParentWorkRect = table->WorkRect;
table->BorderX1 = table->InnerClipRect.Min.x;// +((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) ? 0.0f : -1.0f);
table->BorderX2 = table->InnerClipRect.Max.x;// +((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) ? 0.0f : +1.0f);
table->BorderX1 = table->InnerClipRect.Min.x;
table->BorderX2 = table->InnerClipRect.Max.x;
// Setup window's WorkRect.Max.y for GetContentRegionAvail(). Other values will be updated in each TableBeginCell() call.
float window_content_max_y;
@ -1140,14 +1179,26 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
// [Part 10] Hit testing on borders
if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable)
TableUpdateBorders(table);
table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight = 0.0f;
table_instance->LastTopHeadersRowHeight = 0.0f;
table->IsLayoutLocked = true;
table->IsUsingHeaders = false;
// [Part 11] Context menu
if (TableBeginContextMenuPopup(table))
// Highlight header
table->HighlightColumnHeader = -1;
if (table->IsContextPopupOpen && table->ContextPopupColumn != -1 && table->InstanceInteracted == table->InstanceCurrent)
table->HighlightColumnHeader = table->ContextPopupColumn;
else if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn) && table->HoveredColumnBody != -1 && table->HoveredColumnBody != table->ColumnsCount && table->HoveredColumnBorder == -1)
if (g.ActiveId == 0 || (table->IsActiveIdInTable || g.DragDropActive))
table->HighlightColumnHeader = table->HoveredColumnBody;
// [Part 11] Default context menu
// - To append to this menu: you can call TableBeginContextMenuPopup()/.../EndPopup().
// - To modify or replace this: set table->IsContextPopupNoDefaultContents = true, then call TableBeginContextMenuPopup()/.../EndPopup().
// - You may call TableDrawDefaultContextMenu() with selected flags to display specific sections of the default menu,
// e.g. TableDrawDefaultContextMenu(table, table->Flags & ~ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable) will display everything EXCEPT columns visibility options.
if (table->DisableDefaultContextMenu == false && TableBeginContextMenuPopup(table))
{
TableDrawContextMenu(table);
TableDrawDefaultContextMenu(table, table->Flags);
EndPopup();
}
@ -1184,9 +1235,9 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateBorders(ImGuiTable* table)
// Actual columns highlight/render will be performed in EndTable() and not be affected.
ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent);
const float hit_half_width = TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_HALF_THICKNESS;
const float hit_y1 = table->OuterRect.Min.y;
const float hit_y1 = (table->FreezeRowsCount >= 1 ? table->OuterRect.Min.y : table->WorkRect.Min.y) + table->AngledHeadersHeight;
const float hit_y2_body = ImMax(table->OuterRect.Max.y, hit_y1 + table_instance->LastOuterHeight);
const float hit_y2_head = hit_y1 + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight;
const float hit_y2_head = hit_y1 + table_instance->LastTopHeadersRowHeight;
for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++)
{
@ -1217,7 +1268,7 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateBorders(ImGuiTable* table)
{
TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle(table, column_n);
ClearActiveID();
held = hovered = false;
held = false;
}
if (held)
{
@ -1289,7 +1340,7 @@ void ImGui::EndTable()
max_pos_x = ImMax(max_pos_x, table->Columns[table->RightMostEnabledColumn].WorkMaxX + table->CellPaddingX + table->OuterPaddingX - outer_padding_for_border);
if (table->ResizedColumn != -1)
max_pos_x = ImMax(max_pos_x, table->ResizeLockMinContentsX2);
table->InnerWindow->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = max_pos_x;
table->InnerWindow->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = max_pos_x + table->TempData->AngledheadersExtraWidth;
}
// Pop clipping rect
@ -1361,10 +1412,12 @@ void ImGui::EndTable()
{
ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->ResizedColumn];
const float new_x2 = (g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_HALF_THICKNESS);
const float new_width = ImFloor(new_x2 - column->MinX - table->CellSpacingX1 - table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f);
const float new_width = ImTrunc(new_x2 - column->MinX - table->CellSpacingX1 - table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f);
table->ResizedColumnNextWidth = new_width;
}
table->IsActiveIdInTable = (g.ActiveIdIsAlive != 0 && table->IsActiveIdAliveBeforeTable == false);
// Pop from id stack
IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(inner_window->IDStack.back() == table_instance->TableInstanceID, "Mismatching PushID/PopID!");
IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(outer_window->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size >= temp_data->HostBackupItemWidthStackSize, "Too many PopItemWidth!");
@ -1405,7 +1458,7 @@ void ImGui::EndTable()
}
else if (temp_data->UserOuterSize.x <= 0.0f)
{
const float decoration_size = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? inner_window->ScrollbarSizes.x : 0.0f;
const float decoration_size = table->TempData->AngledheadersExtraWidth + ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? inner_window->ScrollbarSizes.x : 0.0f);
outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x = ImMax(outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x, table->OuterRect.Min.x + table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth + decoration_size - temp_data->UserOuterSize.x);
outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.x, ImMin(table->OuterRect.Max.x, table->OuterRect.Min.x + table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth));
}
@ -1444,7 +1497,7 @@ void ImGui::EndTable()
NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX();
}
// See "COLUMN SIZING POLICIES" comments at the top of this file
// See "COLUMNS SIZING POLICIES" comments at the top of this file
// If (init_width_or_weight <= 0.0f) it is ignored
void ImGui::TableSetupColumn(const char* label, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags, float init_width_or_weight, ImGuiID user_id)
{
@ -1472,6 +1525,11 @@ void ImGui::TableSetupColumn(const char* label, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags, flo
if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_) == 0 && init_width_or_weight > 0.0f)
if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit || (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame)
flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed;
if (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader)
{
flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel;
table->AngledHeadersCount++;
}
TableSetupColumnFlags(table, column, flags);
column->UserID = user_id;
@ -1819,15 +1877,16 @@ void ImGui::TableEndRow(ImGuiTable* table)
const float bg_y2 = table->RowPosY2;
const bool unfreeze_rows_actual = (table->CurrentRow + 1 == table->FreezeRowsCount);
const bool unfreeze_rows_request = (table->CurrentRow + 1 == table->FreezeRowsRequest);
if (table->CurrentRow == 0)
TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent)->LastFirstRowHeight = bg_y2 - bg_y1;
ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent);
if ((table->RowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers) && (table->CurrentRow == 0 || (table->LastRowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers)))
table_instance->LastTopHeadersRowHeight += bg_y2 - bg_y1;
const bool is_visible = (bg_y2 >= table->InnerClipRect.Min.y && bg_y1 <= table->InnerClipRect.Max.y);
if (is_visible)
{
// Update data for TableGetHoveredRow()
if (table->HoveredColumnBody != -1 && g.IO.MousePos.y >= bg_y1 && g.IO.MousePos.y < bg_y2)
TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent)->HoveredRowNext = table->CurrentRow;
table_instance->HoveredRowNext = table->CurrentRow;
// Decide of background color for the row
ImU32 bg_col0 = 0;
@ -1840,15 +1899,14 @@ void ImGui::TableEndRow(ImGuiTable* table)
bg_col1 = table->RowBgColor[1];
// Decide of top border color
ImU32 border_col = 0;
ImU32 top_border_col = 0;
const float border_size = TABLE_BORDER_SIZE;
if (table->CurrentRow > 0 || table->InnerWindow == table->OuterWindow)
if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH)
border_col = (table->LastRowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers) ? table->BorderColorStrong : table->BorderColorLight;
if (table->CurrentRow > 0 && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH))
top_border_col = (table->LastRowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers) ? table->BorderColorStrong : table->BorderColorLight;
const bool draw_cell_bg_color = table->RowCellDataCurrent >= 0;
const bool draw_strong_bottom_border = unfreeze_rows_actual;
if ((bg_col0 | bg_col1 | border_col) != 0 || draw_strong_bottom_border || draw_cell_bg_color)
if ((bg_col0 | bg_col1 | top_border_col) != 0 || draw_strong_bottom_border || draw_cell_bg_color)
{
// In theory we could call SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel() but since we know TableEndRow() is
// always followed by a change of clipping rectangle we perform the smallest overwrite possible here.
@ -1887,8 +1945,8 @@ void ImGui::TableEndRow(ImGuiTable* table)
}
// Draw top border
if (border_col && bg_y1 >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && bg_y1 < table->BgClipRect.Max.y)
window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(table->BorderX1, bg_y1), ImVec2(table->BorderX2, bg_y1), border_col, border_size);
if (top_border_col && bg_y1 >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && bg_y1 < table->BgClipRect.Max.y)
window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(table->BorderX1, bg_y1), ImVec2(table->BorderX2, bg_y1), top_border_col, border_size);
// Draw bottom border at the row unfreezing mark (always strong)
if (draw_strong_bottom_border && bg_y2 >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && bg_y2 < table->BgClipRect.Max.y)
@ -1906,7 +1964,7 @@ void ImGui::TableEndRow(ImGuiTable* table)
IM_ASSERT(table->IsUnfrozenRows == false);
const float y0 = ImMax(table->RowPosY2 + 1, window->InnerClipRect.Min.y);
table->IsUnfrozenRows = true;
TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent)->LastFrozenHeight = y0 - table->OuterRect.Min.y;
table_instance->LastFrozenHeight = y0 - table->OuterRect.Min.y;
// BgClipRect starts as table->InnerClipRect, reduce it now and make BgClipRectForDrawCmd == BgClipRect
table->BgClipRect.Min.y = table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Min.y = ImMin(y0, window->InnerClipRect.Max.y);
@ -2284,6 +2342,7 @@ void ImGui::TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth(ImGuiTable* table)
// - TablePopBackgroundChannel() [Internal]
// - TableSetupDrawChannels() [Internal]
// - TableMergeDrawChannels() [Internal]
// - TableGetColumnBorderCol() [Internal]
// - TableDrawBorders() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -2567,6 +2626,18 @@ void ImGui::TableMergeDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table)
}
}
static ImU32 TableGetColumnBorderCol(ImGuiTable* table, int order_n, int column_n)
{
const bool is_hovered = (table->HoveredColumnBorder == column_n);
const bool is_resized = (table->ResizedColumn == column_n) && (table->InstanceInteracted == table->InstanceCurrent);
const bool is_frozen_separator = (table->FreezeColumnsCount == order_n + 1);
if (is_resized || is_hovered)
return ImGui::GetColorU32(is_resized ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered);
if (is_frozen_separator || (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize)))
return table->BorderColorStrong;
return table->BorderColorLight;
}
// FIXME-TABLE: This is a mess, need to redesign how we render borders (as some are also done in TableEndRow)
void ImGui::TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table)
{
@ -2581,9 +2652,9 @@ void ImGui::TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table)
// Draw inner border and resizing feedback
ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent);
const float border_size = TABLE_BORDER_SIZE;
const float draw_y1 = table->InnerRect.Min.y;
const float draw_y1 = ImMax(table->InnerRect.Min.y, (table->FreezeRowsCount >= 1 ? table->InnerRect.Min.y : table->WorkRect.Min.y) + table->AngledHeadersHeight) + ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH) ? 1.0f : 0.0f);
const float draw_y2_body = table->InnerRect.Max.y;
const float draw_y2_head = table->IsUsingHeaders ? ImMin(table->InnerRect.Max.y, (table->FreezeRowsCount >= 1 ? table->InnerRect.Min.y : table->WorkRect.Min.y) + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight) : draw_y1;
const float draw_y2_head = table->IsUsingHeaders ? ImMin(table->InnerRect.Max.y, (table->FreezeRowsCount >= 1 ? table->InnerRect.Min.y : table->WorkRect.Min.y) + table_instance->LastTopHeadersRowHeight) : draw_y1;
if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV)
{
for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++)
@ -2609,21 +2680,9 @@ void ImGui::TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table)
// Draw in outer window so right-most column won't be clipped
// Always draw full height border when being resized/hovered, or on the delimitation of frozen column scrolling.
ImU32 col;
float draw_y2;
if (is_hovered || is_resized || is_frozen_separator)
{
draw_y2 = draw_y2_body;
col = is_resized ? GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive) : is_hovered ? GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered) : table->BorderColorStrong;
}
else
{
draw_y2 = (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize)) ? draw_y2_head : draw_y2_body;
col = (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize)) ? table->BorderColorStrong : table->BorderColorLight;
}
float draw_y2 = (is_hovered || is_resized || is_frozen_separator || (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize)) == 0) ? draw_y2_body : draw_y2_head;
if (draw_y2 > draw_y1)
inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(column->MaxX, draw_y1), ImVec2(column->MaxX, draw_y2), col, border_size);
inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(column->MaxX, draw_y1), ImVec2(column->MaxX, draw_y2), TableGetColumnBorderCol(table, order_n, column_n), border_size);
}
}
@ -2640,7 +2699,7 @@ void ImGui::TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table)
const ImU32 outer_col = table->BorderColorStrong;
if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) == ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter)
{
inner_drawlist->AddRect(outer_border.Min, outer_border.Max, outer_col, 0.0f, 0, border_size);
inner_drawlist->AddRect(outer_border.Min, outer_border.Max + ImVec2(1, 1), outer_col, 0.0f, 0, border_size);
}
else if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV)
{
@ -2655,7 +2714,7 @@ void ImGui::TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table)
}
if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH) && table->RowPosY2 < table->OuterRect.Max.y)
{
// Draw bottom-most row border
// Draw bottom-most row border between it is above outer border.
const float border_y = table->RowPosY2;
if (border_y >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && border_y < table->BgClipRect.Max.y)
inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(table->BorderX1, border_y), ImVec2(table->BorderX2, border_y), table->BorderColorLight, border_size);
@ -2866,6 +2925,8 @@ void ImGui::TableSortSpecsBuild(ImGuiTable* table)
// - TableGetHeaderRowHeight() [Internal]
// - TableHeadersRow()
// - TableHeader()
// - TableAngledHeadersRow()
// - TableAngledHeadersRowEx() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
float ImGui::TableGetHeaderRowHeight()
@ -2874,16 +2935,26 @@ float ImGui::TableGetHeaderRowHeight()
// Calculate row height, for the unlikely case that some labels may be taller than others.
// If we didn't do that, uneven header height would highlight but smaller one before the tallest wouldn't catch input for all height.
// In your custom header row you may omit this all together and just call TableNextRow() without a height...
float row_height = GetTextLineHeight();
int columns_count = TableGetColumnCount();
for (int column_n = 0; column_n < columns_count; column_n++)
{
ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = TableGetColumnFlags(column_n);
if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled) && !(flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel))
row_height = ImMax(row_height, CalcTextSize(TableGetColumnName(column_n)).y);
}
row_height += GetStyle().CellPadding.y * 2.0f;
return row_height;
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
float row_height = g.FontSize;
for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
if (IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByIndex, column_n))
if ((table->Columns[column_n].Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel) == 0)
row_height = ImMax(row_height, CalcTextSize(TableGetColumnName(table, column_n)).y);
return row_height + g.Style.CellPadding.y * 2.0f;
}
float ImGui::TableGetHeaderAngledMaxLabelWidth()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
float width = 0.0f;
for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
if (IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByIndex, column_n))
if (table->Columns[column_n].Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader)
width = ImMax(width, CalcTextSize(TableGetColumnName(table, column_n), NULL, true).x);
return width + g.Style.CellPadding.x * 2.0f;
}
// [Public] This is a helper to output TableHeader() calls based on the column names declared in TableSetupColumn().
@ -2903,9 +2974,9 @@ void ImGui::TableHeadersRow()
TableUpdateLayout(table);
// Open row
const float row_y1 = GetCursorScreenPos().y;
const float row_height = TableGetHeaderRowHeight();
TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers, row_height);
const float row_y1 = GetCursorScreenPos().y;
if (table->HostSkipItems) // Merely an optimization, you may skip in your own code.
return;
@ -2927,7 +2998,7 @@ void ImGui::TableHeadersRow()
ImVec2 mouse_pos = ImGui::GetMousePos();
if (IsMouseReleased(1) && TableGetHoveredColumn() == columns_count)
if (mouse_pos.y >= row_y1 && mouse_pos.y < row_y1 + row_height)
TableOpenContextMenu(-1); // Will open a non-column-specific popup.
TableOpenContextMenu(columns_count); // Will open a non-column-specific popup.
}
// Emit a column header (text + optional sort order)
@ -2961,11 +3032,14 @@ void ImGui::TableHeader(const char* label)
// Calculate ideal size for sort order arrow
float w_arrow = 0.0f;
float w_sort_text = 0.0f;
bool sort_arrow = false;
char sort_order_suf[4] = "";
const float ARROW_SCALE = 0.65f;
if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort))
{
w_arrow = ImFloor(g.FontSize * ARROW_SCALE + g.Style.FramePadding.x);
w_arrow = ImTrunc(g.FontSize * ARROW_SCALE + g.Style.FramePadding.x);
if (column->SortOrder != -1)
sort_arrow = true;
if (column->SortOrder > 0)
{
ImFormatString(sort_order_suf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(sort_order_suf), "%d", column->SortOrder + 1);
@ -2973,13 +3047,12 @@ void ImGui::TableHeader(const char* label)
}
}
// We feed our unclipped width to the column without writing on CursorMaxPos, so that column is still considering for merging.
// We feed our unclipped width to the column without writing on CursorMaxPos, so that column is still considered for merging.
float max_pos_x = label_pos.x + label_size.x + w_sort_text + w_arrow;
column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed, column->WorkMaxX);
column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed, sort_arrow ? cell_r.Max.x : ImMin(max_pos_x, cell_r.Max.x));
column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal, max_pos_x);
// Keep header highlighted when context menu is open.
const bool selected = (table->IsContextPopupOpen && table->ContextPopupColumn == column_n && table->InstanceInteracted == table->InstanceCurrent);
ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
ImRect bb(cell_r.Min.x, cell_r.Min.y, cell_r.Max.x, ImMax(cell_r.Max.y, cell_r.Min.y + label_height + g.Style.CellPadding.y * 2.0f));
ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, label_height)); // Don't declare unclipped width, it'll be fed ContentMaxPosHeadersIdeal
@ -2990,9 +3063,10 @@ void ImGui::TableHeader(const char* label)
//GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); // [DEBUG]
// Using AllowOverlap mode because we cover the whole cell, and we want user to be able to submit subsequent items.
const bool highlight = (table->HighlightColumnHeader == column_n);
bool hovered, held;
bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap);
if (held || hovered || selected)
if (held || hovered || highlight)
{
const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
//RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f);
@ -3070,11 +3144,126 @@ void ImGui::TableHeader(const char* label)
TableOpenContextMenu(column_n);
}
// Unlike TableHeadersRow() it is not expected that you can reimplement or customize this with custom widgets.
// FIXME: highlight without ImGuiTableFlags_HighlightHoveredColumn
// FIXME: No hit-testing/button on the angled header.
void ImGui::TableAngledHeadersRow()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
TableAngledHeadersRowEx(g.Style.TableAngledHeadersAngle, 0.0f);
}
void ImGui::TableAngledHeadersRowEx(float angle, float max_label_width)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList;
IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Need to call TableHeadersRow() after BeginTable()!");
IM_ASSERT(table->CurrentRow == -1 && "Must be first row");
if (max_label_width == 0.0f)
max_label_width = TableGetHeaderAngledMaxLabelWidth();
// Angle argument expressed in (-IM_PI/2 .. +IM_PI/2) as it is easier to think about for user.
const bool flip_label = (angle < 0.0f);
angle -= IM_PI * 0.5f;
const float cos_a = ImCos(angle);
const float sin_a = ImSin(angle);
const float label_cos_a = flip_label ? ImCos(angle + IM_PI) : cos_a;
const float label_sin_a = flip_label ? ImSin(angle + IM_PI) : sin_a;
const ImVec2 unit_right = ImVec2(cos_a, sin_a);
// Calculate our base metrics and set angled headers data _before_ the first call to TableNextRow()
// FIXME-STYLE: Would it be better for user to submit 'max_label_width' or 'row_height' ? One can be derived from the other.
const float header_height = table->RowCellPaddingY * 2.0f + g.FontSize;
const float row_height = ImFabs(ImRotate(ImVec2(max_label_width, flip_label ? +header_height : -header_height), cos_a, sin_a).y);
const ImVec2 header_angled_vector = unit_right * (row_height / -sin_a);
table->AngledHeadersHeight = row_height;
table->AngledHeadersSlope = (sin_a != 0.0f) ? (cos_a / sin_a) : 0.0f;
// Declare row, override and draw our own background
TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers, row_height);
TableNextColumn();
table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG0);
float clip_rect_min_x = table->BgClipRect.Min.x;
if (table->FreezeColumnsCount > 0)
clip_rect_min_x = ImMax(clip_rect_min_x, table->Columns[table->FreezeColumnsCount - 1].MaxX);
TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0, 0); // Cancel
PushClipRect(table->BgClipRect.Min, table->BgClipRect.Max, false); // Span all columns
draw_list->AddRectFilled(table->BgClipRect.Min, table->BgClipRect.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg, 0.25f)); // FIXME-STYLE: Change row background with an arbitrary color.
PushClipRect(ImVec2(clip_rect_min_x, table->BgClipRect.Min.y), table->BgClipRect.Max, true); // Span all columns
const ImRect row_r(table->WorkRect.Min.x, table->BgClipRect.Min.y, table->WorkRect.Max.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + row_height);
const ImGuiID row_id = GetID("##AngledHeaders");
ButtonBehavior(row_r, row_id, NULL, NULL);
KeepAliveID(row_id);
ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent);
int highlight_column_n = table->HighlightColumnHeader;
if (highlight_column_n == -1 && table->HoveredColumnBody != -1)
if (table_instance->HoveredRowLast == 0 && table->HoveredColumnBorder == -1 && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == row_id || (table->IsActiveIdInTable || g.DragDropActive)))
highlight_column_n = table->HoveredColumnBody;
float max_x = 0.0f;
for (int pass = 0; pass < 2; pass++)
for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++)
{
if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder, order_n))
continue;
const int column_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n];
ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AngledHeader) == 0) // Note: can't rely on ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible test here.
continue;
ImVec2 bg_shape[4];
bg_shape[0] = ImVec2(column->MaxX, row_r.Max.y);
bg_shape[1] = ImVec2(column->MinX, row_r.Max.y);
bg_shape[2] = bg_shape[1] + header_angled_vector;
bg_shape[3] = bg_shape[0] + header_angled_vector;
if (pass == 0)
{
// Draw shape
draw_list->AddQuadFilled(bg_shape[0], bg_shape[1], bg_shape[2], bg_shape[3], GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg));
if (column_n == highlight_column_n)
draw_list->AddQuadFilled(bg_shape[0], bg_shape[1], bg_shape[2], bg_shape[3], GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Header)); // Highlight on hover
//draw_list->AddQuad(bg_shape[0], bg_shape[1], bg_shape[2], bg_shape[3], GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight), 1.0f);
max_x = ImMax(max_x, bg_shape[3].x);
// Draw label (first draw at an offset where RenderTextXXX() function won't meddle with applying current ClipRect, then transform to final offset)
// FIXME: May be worth tidying up all those operations to make them easier to understand.
const char* label_name = TableGetColumnName(table, column_n);
const float clip_width = max_label_width - (sin_a * table->RowCellPaddingY);
ImRect label_r(window->ClipRect.Min, window->ClipRect.Min + ImVec2(clip_width + (flip_label ? 0.0f : table->CellPaddingX), header_height + table->RowCellPaddingY));
ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label_name, NULL, true);
ImVec2 label_off = ImVec2(flip_label ? ImMax(0.0f, max_label_width - label_size.x - table->CellPaddingX) : table->CellPaddingX, table->RowCellPaddingY);
int vtx_idx_begin = draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx;
RenderTextEllipsis(draw_list, label_r.Min + label_off, label_r.Max, label_r.Max.x, label_r.Max.x, label_name, NULL, &label_size);
//if (g.IO.KeyShift) { draw_list->AddRect(label_r.Min, label_r.Max, IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f); }
int vtx_idx_end = draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx;
// Rotate and offset label
ImVec2 pivot_in = label_r.GetBL();
ImVec2 pivot_out = ImVec2(column->WorkMinX, row_r.Max.y) + (flip_label ? (unit_right * clip_width) : ImVec2(header_height, 0.0f));
ShadeVertsTransformPos(draw_list, vtx_idx_begin, vtx_idx_end, pivot_in, label_cos_a, label_sin_a, pivot_out); // Rotate and offset
}
if (pass == 1)
{
// Draw border
draw_list->AddLine(bg_shape[0], bg_shape[3], TableGetColumnBorderCol(table, order_n, column_n));
}
}
PopClipRect();
PopClipRect();
table->TempData->AngledheadersExtraWidth = ImMax(0.0f, max_x - table->Columns[table->RightMostEnabledColumn].MaxX);
}
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Tables: Context Menu
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - TableOpenContextMenu() [Internal]
// - TableDrawContextMenu() [Internal]
// - TableBeginContextMenuPopup() [Internal]
// - TableDrawDefaultContextMenu() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Use -1 to open menu not specific to a given column.
@ -3110,7 +3299,13 @@ bool ImGui::TableBeginContextMenuPopup(ImGuiTable* table)
// Output context menu into current window (generally a popup)
// FIXME-TABLE: Ideally this should be writable by the user. Full programmatic access to that data?
void ImGui::TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table)
// Sections to display are pulled from 'flags_for_section_to_display', which is typically == table->Flags.
// - ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable -> display Sizing menu items
// - ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable -> display "Reset Order"
////- ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable -> display sorting options (disabled)
// - ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable -> display columns visibility menu items
// It means if you have a custom context menus you can call this section and omit some sections, and add your own.
void ImGui::TableDrawDefaultContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableFlags flags_for_section_to_display)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
@ -3122,7 +3317,7 @@ void ImGui::TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table)
ImGuiTableColumn* column = (column_n != -1) ? &table->Columns[column_n] : NULL;
// Sizing
if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable)
if (flags_for_section_to_display & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable)
{
if (column != NULL)
{
@ -3142,7 +3337,7 @@ void ImGui::TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table)
}
// Ordering
if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable)
if (flags_for_section_to_display & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable)
{
if (MenuItem(LocalizeGetMsg(ImGuiLocKey_TableResetOrder), NULL, false, !table->IsDefaultDisplayOrder))
table->IsResetDisplayOrderRequest = true;
@ -3156,7 +3351,7 @@ void ImGui::TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table)
// Sorting
// (modify TableOpenContextMenu() to add _Sortable flag if enabling this)
#if 0
if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && column != NULL && (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort) == 0)
if ((flags_for_section_to_display & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && column != NULL && (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort) == 0)
{
if (want_separator)
Separator();
@ -3171,7 +3366,7 @@ void ImGui::TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table)
#endif
// Hiding / Visibility
if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable)
if (flags_for_section_to_display & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable)
{
if (want_separator)
Separator();
@ -3939,7 +4134,7 @@ void ImGui::BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiOldColumnFl
// Set state for first column
// We aim so that the right-most column will have the same clipping width as other after being clipped by parent ClipRect
const float column_padding = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
const float half_clip_extend_x = ImFloor(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f, window->WindowBorderSize));
const float half_clip_extend_x = ImTrunc(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f, window->WindowBorderSize));
const float max_1 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + column_padding - ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
const float max_2 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + half_clip_extend_x;
columns->OffMinX = window->DC.Indent.x - column_padding + ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
@ -3986,7 +4181,7 @@ void ImGui::BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiOldColumnFl
float width = offset_1 - offset_0;
PushItemWidth(width * 0.65f);
window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_TRUNC(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + offset_1 - column_padding;
window->WorkRect.Max.y = window->ContentRegionRect.Max.y;
}
@ -4002,7 +4197,7 @@ void ImGui::NextColumn()
if (columns->Count == 1)
{
window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_TRUNC(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
IM_ASSERT(columns->Current == 0);
return;
}
@ -4034,7 +4229,7 @@ void ImGui::NextColumn()
window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY;
}
window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_TRUNC(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMinY;
window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
@ -4098,7 +4293,7 @@ void ImGui::EndColumns()
// Draw column
const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
const float xi = IM_FLOOR(x);
const float xi = IM_TRUNC(x);
window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(xi, y1 + 1.0f), ImVec2(xi, y2), col);
}
@ -4119,7 +4314,7 @@ void ImGui::EndColumns()
window->ParentWorkRect = columns->HostBackupParentWorkRect;
window->DC.CurrentColumns = NULL;
window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_TRUNC(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX();
}

486
imgui/imgui_widgets.cpp
View File

@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
// dear imgui, v1.89.9
// dear imgui, v1.90.0
// (widgets code)
/*
@ -18,6 +18,8 @@ Index of this file:
// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
// [SECTION] Widgets: Typing-Select support
// [SECTION] Widgets: Multi-Select support
// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
@ -806,7 +808,7 @@ bool ImGui::CloseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos)
ImRect bb_interact = bb;
const float area_to_visible_ratio = window->OuterRectClipped.GetArea() / bb.GetArea();
if (area_to_visible_ratio < 1.5f)
bb_interact.Expand(ImFloor(bb_interact.GetSize() * -0.25f));
bb_interact.Expand(ImTrunc(bb_interact.GetSize() * -0.25f));
// Tweak 2: We intentionally allow interaction when clipped so that a mechanical Alt,Right,Activate sequence can always close a window.
// (this isn't the common behavior of buttons, but it doesn't affect the user because navigation tends to keep items visible in scrolling layer).
@ -860,7 +862,7 @@ bool ImGui::CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiDockNode* dock_no
// Switch to moving the window after mouse is moved beyond the initial drag threshold
if (IsItemActive() && IsMouseDragging(0))
StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(window, dock_node, true);
StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(window, dock_node, true); // Undock from window/collapse menu button
return pressed;
}
@ -942,7 +944,7 @@ bool ImGui::ScrollbarEx(const ImRect& bb_frame, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, ImS6
const bool allow_interaction = (alpha >= 1.0f);
ImRect bb = bb_frame;
bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_width - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_height - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f)));
bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp(IM_TRUNC((bb_frame_width - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp(IM_TRUNC((bb_frame_height - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f)));
// V denote the main, longer axis of the scrollbar (= height for a vertical scrollbar)
const float scrollbar_size_v = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? bb.GetWidth() : bb.GetHeight();
@ -1037,7 +1039,7 @@ void ImGui::Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2&
// ImageButton() is flawed as 'id' is always derived from 'texture_id' (see #2464 #1390)
// We provide this internal helper to write your own variant while we figure out how to redesign the public ImageButton() API.
bool ImGui::ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
bool ImGui::ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& image_size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
@ -1045,7 +1047,7 @@ bool ImGui::ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& size
return false;
const ImVec2 padding = g.Style.FramePadding;
const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size + padding * 2.0f);
const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + image_size + padding * 2.0f);
ItemSize(bb);
if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
return false;
@ -1064,14 +1066,15 @@ bool ImGui::ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& size
return pressed;
}
bool ImGui::ImageButton(const char* str_id, ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col)
// Note that ImageButton() adds style.FramePadding*2.0f to provided size. This is in order to facilitate fitting an image in a button.
bool ImGui::ImageButton(const char* str_id, ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& image_size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
if (window->SkipItems)
return false;
return ImageButtonEx(window->GetID(str_id), user_texture_id, size, uv0, uv1, bg_col, tint_col);
return ImageButtonEx(window->GetID(str_id), user_texture_id, image_size, uv0, uv1, bg_col, tint_col);
}
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
@ -1138,12 +1141,12 @@ bool ImGui::Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v)
{
// Undocumented tristate/mixed/indeterminate checkbox (#2644)
// This may seem awkwardly designed because the aim is to make ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue supported by all widgets (not just checkbox)
ImVec2 pad(ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f)), ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f)));
ImVec2 pad(ImMax(1.0f, IM_TRUNC(square_sz / 3.6f)), ImMax(1.0f, IM_TRUNC(square_sz / 3.6f)));
window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(check_bb.Min + pad, check_bb.Max - pad, check_col, style.FrameRounding);
}
else if (*v)
{
const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f));
const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_TRUNC(square_sz / 6.0f));
RenderCheckMark(window->DrawList, check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), check_col, square_sz - pad * 2.0f);
}
@ -1238,7 +1241,7 @@ bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, bool active)
window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), num_segment);
if (active)
{
const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f));
const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_TRUNC(square_sz / 6.0f));
window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius - pad, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark));
}
@ -1418,26 +1421,19 @@ void ImGui::SeparatorEx(ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags, float thickness)
else if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal)
{
// Horizontal Separator
float x1 = window->Pos.x;
float x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x;
// FIXME-WORKRECT: old hack (#205) until we decide of consistent behavior with WorkRect/Indent and Separator
if (g.GroupStack.Size > 0 && g.GroupStack.back().WindowID == window->ID)
x1 += window->DC.Indent.x;
// FIXME-WORKRECT: In theory we should simply be using WorkRect.Min.x/Max.x everywhere but it isn't aesthetically what we want,
// need to introduce a variant of WorkRect for that purpose. (#4787)
if (ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable)
{
x1 = table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn].MinX;
x2 = table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn].MaxX;
}
float x1 = window->DC.CursorPos.x;
float x2 = window->WorkRect.Max.x;
// Preserve legacy behavior inside Columns()
// Before Tables API happened, we relied on Separator() to span all columns of a Columns() set.
// We currently don't need to provide the same feature for tables because tables naturally have border features.
ImGuiOldColumns* columns = (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? window->DC.CurrentColumns : NULL;
if (columns)
{
x1 = window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x; // Used to be Pos.x before 2023/10/03
x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x;
PushColumnsBackground();
}
// We don't provide our width to the layout so that it doesn't get feed back into AutoFit
// FIXME: This prevents ->CursorMaxPos based bounding box evaluation from working (e.g. TableEndCell)
@ -1471,7 +1467,11 @@ void ImGui::Separator()
// Those flags should eventually be configurable by the user
// FIXME: We cannot g.Style.SeparatorTextBorderSize for thickness as it relates to SeparatorText() which is a decorated separator, not defaulting to 1.0f.
ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags = (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical : ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal;
flags |= ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns; // NB: this only applies to legacy Columns() api as they relied on Separator() a lot.
// Only applies to legacy Columns() api as they relied on Separator() a lot.
if (window->DC.CurrentColumns)
flags |= ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns;
SeparatorEx(flags, 1.0f);
}
@ -1488,14 +1488,14 @@ void ImGui::SeparatorTextEx(ImGuiID id, const char* label, const char* label_end
const float separator_thickness = style.SeparatorTextBorderSize;
const ImVec2 min_size(label_size.x + extra_w + padding.x * 2.0f, ImMax(label_size.y + padding.y * 2.0f, separator_thickness));
const ImRect bb(pos, ImVec2(window->WorkRect.Max.x, pos.y + min_size.y));
const float text_baseline_y = ImFloor((bb.GetHeight() - label_size.y) * style.SeparatorTextAlign.y + 0.99999f); //ImMax(padding.y, ImFloor((style.SeparatorTextSize - label_size.y) * 0.5f));
const float text_baseline_y = ImTrunc((bb.GetHeight() - label_size.y) * style.SeparatorTextAlign.y + 0.99999f); //ImMax(padding.y, ImTrunc((style.SeparatorTextSize - label_size.y) * 0.5f));
ItemSize(min_size, text_baseline_y);
if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
return;
const float sep1_x1 = pos.x;
const float sep2_x2 = bb.Max.x;
const float seps_y = ImFloor((bb.Min.y + bb.Max.y) * 0.5f + 0.99999f);
const float seps_y = ImTrunc((bb.Min.y + bb.Max.y) * 0.5f + 0.99999f);
const float label_avail_w = ImMax(0.0f, sep2_x2 - sep1_x1 - padding.x * 2.0f);
const ImVec2 label_pos(pos.x + padding.x + ImMax(0.0f, (label_avail_w - label_size.x - extra_w) * style.SeparatorTextAlign.x), pos.y + text_baseline_y); // FIXME-ALIGN
@ -1570,8 +1570,7 @@ bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float
ImRect bb_render = bb;
if (held)
{
ImVec2 mouse_delta_2d = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min;
float mouse_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? mouse_delta_2d.y : mouse_delta_2d.x;
float mouse_delta = (g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min)[axis];
// Minimum pane size
float size_1_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size1 - min_size1);
@ -1584,12 +1583,8 @@ bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float
// Apply resize
if (mouse_delta != 0.0f)
{
if (mouse_delta < 0.0f)
IM_ASSERT(*size1 + mouse_delta >= min_size1);
if (mouse_delta > 0.0f)
IM_ASSERT(*size2 - mouse_delta >= min_size2);
*size1 += mouse_delta;
*size2 -= mouse_delta;
*size1 = ImMax(*size1 + mouse_delta, min_size1);
*size2 = ImMax(*size2 - mouse_delta, min_size2);
bb_render.Translate((axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImVec2(mouse_delta, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, mouse_delta));
MarkItemEdited(id);
}
@ -1643,7 +1638,7 @@ void ImGui::ShrinkWidths(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* items, int count, float width_exc
width_excess = 0.0f;
for (int n = 0; n < count; n++)
{
float width_rounded = ImFloor(items[n].Width);
float width_rounded = ImTrunc(items[n].Width);
width_excess += items[n].Width - width_rounded;
items[n].Width = width_rounded;
}
@ -1689,10 +1684,13 @@ bool ImGui::BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboF
const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) != (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)); // Can't use both flags together
if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_WidthFitPreview)
IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview | ImGuiComboFlags_CustomPreview)) == 0);
const float arrow_size = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? 0.0f : GetFrameHeight();
const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
const float w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : CalcItemWidth();
const float preview_width = ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_WidthFitPreview) && (preview_value != NULL)) ? CalcTextSize(preview_value, NULL, true).x : 0.0f;
const float w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_WidthFitPreview) ? (arrow_size + preview_width + style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f) : CalcItemWidth());
const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
const ImRect total_bb(bb.Min, bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
@ -1874,18 +1872,15 @@ void ImGui::EndComboPreview()
}
// Getter for the old Combo() API: const char*[]
static bool Items_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
static const char* Items_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx)
{
const char* const* items = (const char* const*)data;
if (out_text)
*out_text = items[idx];
return true;
return items[idx];
}
// Getter for the old Combo() API: "item1\0item2\0item3\0"
static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
static const char* Items_SingleStringGetter(void* data, int idx)
{
// FIXME-OPT: we could pre-compute the indices to fasten this. But only 1 active combo means the waste is limited.
const char* items_separated_by_zeros = (const char*)data;
int items_count = 0;
const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros;
@ -1896,22 +1891,18 @@ static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
p += strlen(p) + 1;
items_count++;
}
if (!*p)
return false;
if (out_text)
*out_text = p;
return true;
return *p ? p : NULL;
}
// Old API, prefer using BeginCombo() nowadays if you can.
bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items)
bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* (*getter)(void* user_data, int idx), void* user_data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
// Call the getter to obtain the preview string which is a parameter to BeginCombo()
const char* preview_value = NULL;
if (*current_item >= 0 && *current_item < items_count)
items_getter(data, *current_item, &preview_value);
preview_value = getter(user_data, *current_item);
// The old Combo() API exposed "popup_max_height_in_items". The new more general BeginCombo() API doesn't have/need it, but we emulate it here.
if (popup_max_height_in_items != -1 && !(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint))
@ -1925,11 +1916,12 @@ bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(voi
bool value_changed = false;
for (int i = 0; i < items_count; i++)
{
const char* item_text = getter(user_data, i);
if (item_text == NULL)
item_text = "*Unknown item*";
PushID(i);
const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
const char* item_text;
if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
item_text = "*Unknown item*";
if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected) && *current_item != i)
{
value_changed = true;
@ -1969,6 +1961,30 @@ bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separa
return value_changed;
}
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
struct ImGuiGetNameFromIndexOldToNewCallbackData { void* UserData; bool (*OldCallback)(void*, int, const char**); };
static const char* ImGuiGetNameFromIndexOldToNewCallback(void* user_data, int idx)
{
ImGuiGetNameFromIndexOldToNewCallbackData* data = (ImGuiGetNameFromIndexOldToNewCallbackData*)user_data;
const char* s = NULL;
data->OldCallback(data->UserData, idx, &s);
return s;
}
bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*old_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* user_data, int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
ImGuiGetNameFromIndexOldToNewCallbackData old_to_new_data = { user_data, old_getter };
return ListBox(label, current_item, ImGuiGetNameFromIndexOldToNewCallback, &old_to_new_data, items_count, height_in_items);
}
bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*old_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* user_data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items)
{
ImGuiGetNameFromIndexOldToNewCallbackData old_to_new_data = { user_data, old_getter };
return Combo(label, current_item, ImGuiGetNameFromIndexOldToNewCallback, &old_to_new_data, items_count, popup_max_height_in_items);
}
#endif
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -3699,7 +3715,7 @@ namespace ImStb
{
static int STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(const ImGuiInputTextState* obj) { return obj->CurLenW; }
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx) { return obj->TextW[idx]; }
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx) { IM_ASSERT(idx <= obj->CurLenW); return obj->TextW[idx]; }
static float STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int line_start_idx, int char_idx) { ImWchar c = obj->TextW[line_start_idx + char_idx]; if (c == '\n') return STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE; ImGuiContext& g = *obj->Ctx; return g.Font->GetCharAdvance(c) * (g.FontSize / g.Font->FontSize); }
static int STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(int key) { return key >= 0x200000 ? 0 : key; }
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE = '\n';
@ -4129,13 +4145,18 @@ bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, int buf_
item_data_backup = g.LastItemData;
window->DC.CursorPos = backup_pos;
// Prevent NavActivate reactivating in BeginChild().
const ImGuiID backup_activate_id = g.NavActivateId;
if (g.ActiveId == id) // Prevent reactivation
g.NavActivateId = 0;
// We reproduce the contents of BeginChildFrame() in order to provide 'label' so our window internal data are easier to read/debug.
// FIXME-NAV: Pressing NavActivate will trigger general child activation right before triggering our own below. Harmless but bizarre.
PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]);
PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.FrameRounding);
PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, style.FrameBorderSize);
PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0)); // Ensure no clip rect so mouse hover can reach FramePadding edges
bool child_visible = BeginChildEx(label, id, frame_bb.GetSize(), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);
g.NavActivateId = backup_activate_id;
PopStyleVar(3);
PopStyleColor();
if (!child_visible)
@ -4872,9 +4893,9 @@ bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, int buf_
const float scroll_increment_x = inner_size.x * 0.25f;
const float visible_width = inner_size.x - style.FramePadding.x;
if (cursor_offset.x < state->ScrollX)
state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x));
state->ScrollX = IM_TRUNC(ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x));
else if (cursor_offset.x - visible_width >= state->ScrollX)
state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(cursor_offset.x - visible_width + scroll_increment_x);
state->ScrollX = IM_TRUNC(cursor_offset.x - visible_width + scroll_increment_x);
}
else
{
@ -4924,7 +4945,7 @@ bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, int buf_
else
{
ImVec2 rect_size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(&g, p, text_selected_end, &p, NULL, true);
if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f) rect_size.x = IM_FLOOR(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines
if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f) rect_size.x = IM_TRUNC(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines
ImRect rect(rect_pos + ImVec2(0.0f, bg_offy_up - g.FontSize), rect_pos + ImVec2(rect_size.x, bg_offy_dn));
rect.ClipWith(clip_rect);
if (rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
@ -4947,7 +4968,7 @@ bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, int buf_
{
state->CursorAnim += io.DeltaTime;
bool cursor_is_visible = (!g.IO.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink) || (state->CursorAnim <= 0.0f) || ImFmod(state->CursorAnim, 1.20f) <= 0.80f;
ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = ImFloor(draw_pos + cursor_offset - draw_scroll);
ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = ImTrunc(draw_pos + cursor_offset - draw_scroll);
ImRect cursor_screen_rect(cursor_screen_pos.x, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize + 0.5f, cursor_screen_pos.x + 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - 1.5f);
if (cursor_is_visible && cursor_screen_rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
draw_window->DrawList->AddLine(cursor_screen_rect.Min, cursor_screen_rect.GetBL(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
@ -5032,7 +5053,7 @@ void ImGui::DebugNodeInputTextState(ImGuiInputTextState* state)
Text("CurLenW: %d, CurLenA: %d, Cursor: %d, Selection: %d..%d", state->CurLenW, state->CurLenA, stb_state->cursor, stb_state->select_start, stb_state->select_end);
Text("has_preferred_x: %d (%.2f)", stb_state->has_preferred_x, stb_state->preferred_x);
Text("undo_point: %d, redo_point: %d, undo_char_point: %d, redo_char_point: %d", undo_state->undo_point, undo_state->redo_point, undo_state->undo_char_point, undo_state->redo_char_point);
if (BeginChild("undopoints", ImVec2(0.0f, GetTextLineHeight() * 15), true)) // Visualize undo state
if (BeginChild("undopoints", ImVec2(0.0f, GetTextLineHeight() * 15), ImGuiChildFlags_Border)) // Visualize undo state
{
PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
for (int n = 0; n < STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT; n++)
@ -5177,8 +5198,8 @@ bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flag
if ((flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV)) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
{
// RGB/HSV 0..255 Sliders
const float w_item_one = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR((w_inputs - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)) / (float)components));
const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(w_inputs - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)));
const float w_item_one = ImMax(1.0f, IM_TRUNC((w_inputs - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)) / (float)components));
const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, IM_TRUNC(w_inputs - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)));
const bool hide_prefix = (w_item_one <= CalcTextSize((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) ? "M:0.000" : "M:000").x);
static const char* ids[4] = { "##X", "##Y", "##Z", "##W" };
@ -5422,7 +5443,7 @@ bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags fl
float sv_picker_size = ImMax(bars_width * 1, width - (alpha_bar ? 2 : 1) * (bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x)); // Saturation/Value picking box
float bar0_pos_x = picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
float bar1_pos_x = bar0_pos_x + bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
float bars_triangles_half_sz = IM_FLOOR(bars_width * 0.20f);
float bars_triangles_half_sz = IM_TRUNC(bars_width * 0.20f);
float backup_initial_col[4];
memcpy(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float));
@ -5590,7 +5611,7 @@ bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags fl
if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
{
PushItemWidth((alpha_bar ? bar1_pos_x : bar0_pos_x) + bars_width - picker_pos.x);
ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags = (flags & sub_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker;
if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0)
if (ColorEdit4("##rgb", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB))
@ -6146,36 +6167,52 @@ bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* l
// We vertically grow up to current line height up the typical widget height.
const float frame_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2), label_size.y + padding.y * 2);
const bool span_all_columns = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAllColumns) != 0 && (g.CurrentTable != NULL);
ImRect frame_bb;
frame_bb.Min.x = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth) ? window->WorkRect.Min.x : window->DC.CursorPos.x;
frame_bb.Min.x = span_all_columns ? window->ParentWorkRect.Min.x : (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth) ? window->WorkRect.Min.x : window->DC.CursorPos.x;
frame_bb.Min.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
frame_bb.Max.x = window->WorkRect.Max.x;
frame_bb.Max.x = span_all_columns ? window->ParentWorkRect.Max.x : window->WorkRect.Max.x;
frame_bb.Max.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y + frame_height;
if (display_frame)
{
// Framed header expand a little outside the default padding, to the edge of InnerClipRect
// (FIXME: May remove this at some point and make InnerClipRect align with WindowPadding.x instead of WindowPadding.x*0.5f)
frame_bb.Min.x -= IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f - 1.0f);
frame_bb.Max.x += IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
frame_bb.Min.x -= IM_TRUNC(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f - 1.0f);
frame_bb.Max.x += IM_TRUNC(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
}
const float text_offset_x = g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x * 3 : padding.x * 2); // Collapser arrow width + Spacing
const float text_offset_x = g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x * 3 : padding.x * 2); // Collapsing arrow width + Spacing
const float text_offset_y = ImMax(padding.y, window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset); // Latch before ItemSize changes it
const float text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x * 2 : 0.0f); // Include collapser
const float text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x * 2 : 0.0f); // Include collapsing
ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + text_offset_x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + text_offset_y);
ItemSize(ImVec2(text_width, frame_height), padding.y);
// For regular tree nodes, we arbitrary allow to click past 2 worth of ItemSpacing
ImRect interact_bb = frame_bb;
if (!display_frame && (flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth)) == 0)
if (!display_frame && (flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAllColumns)) == 0)
interact_bb.Max.x = frame_bb.Min.x + text_width + style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f;
// Modify ClipRect for the ItemAdd(), faster than doing a PushColumnsBackground/PushTableBackgroundChannel for every Selectable..
const float backup_clip_rect_min_x = window->ClipRect.Min.x;
const float backup_clip_rect_max_x = window->ClipRect.Max.x;
if (span_all_columns)
{
window->ClipRect.Min.x = window->ParentWorkRect.Min.x;
window->ClipRect.Max.x = window->ParentWorkRect.Max.x;
}
// Compute open and multi-select states before ItemAdd() as it clear NextItem data.
bool is_open = TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(id, flags);
bool item_add = ItemAdd(interact_bb, id);
g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect;
g.LastItemData.DisplayRect = frame_bb;
if (span_all_columns)
{
window->ClipRect.Min.x = backup_clip_rect_min_x;
window->ClipRect.Max.x = backup_clip_rect_max_x;
}
// If a NavLeft request is happening and ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere enabled:
// Store data for the current depth to allow returning to this node from any child item.
// For this purpose we essentially compare if g.NavIdIsAlive went from 0 to 1 between TreeNode() and TreePop().
@ -6201,6 +6238,9 @@ bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* l
return is_open;
}
if (span_all_columns)
TablePushBackgroundChannel();
ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None;
if ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap) || (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap))
button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap;
@ -6301,7 +6341,6 @@ bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* l
if (g.LogEnabled)
LogSetNextTextDecoration("###", "###");
RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
}
else
{
@ -6318,9 +6357,17 @@ bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* l
RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.15f), text_col, is_open ? ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_UpsideDownArrow) ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down) : ImGuiDir_Right, 0.70f);
if (g.LogEnabled)
LogSetNextTextDecoration(">", NULL);
RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false);
}
if (span_all_columns)
TablePopBackgroundChannel();
// Label
if (display_frame)
RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
else
RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false);
if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
TreePushOverrideID(id);
IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
@ -6487,8 +6534,8 @@ bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags fl
{
const float spacing_x = span_all_columns ? 0.0f : style.ItemSpacing.x;
const float spacing_y = style.ItemSpacing.y;
const float spacing_L = IM_FLOOR(spacing_x * 0.50f);
const float spacing_U = IM_FLOOR(spacing_y * 0.50f);
const float spacing_L = IM_TRUNC(spacing_x * 0.50f);
const float spacing_U = IM_TRUNC(spacing_y * 0.50f);
bb.Min.x -= spacing_L;
bb.Min.y -= spacing_U;
bb.Max.x += (spacing_x - spacing_L);
@ -6496,7 +6543,7 @@ bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags fl
}
//if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) { GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); }
// Modify ClipRect for the ItemAdd(), faster than doing a PushColumnsBackground/PushTableBackground for every Selectable..
// Modify ClipRect for the ItemAdd(), faster than doing a PushColumnsBackground/PushTableBackgroundChannel for every Selectable..
const float backup_clip_rect_min_x = window->ClipRect.Min.x;
const float backup_clip_rect_max_x = window->ClipRect.Max.x;
if (span_all_columns)
@ -6604,6 +6651,212 @@ bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags
return false;
}
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Typing-Select support
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [Experimental] Currently not exposed in public API.
// Consume character inputs and return search request, if any.
// This would typically only be called on the focused window or location you want to grab inputs for, e.g.
// if (ImGui::IsWindowFocused(...))
// if (ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* req = ImGui::GetTypingSelectRequest())
// focus_idx = ImGui::TypingSelectFindMatch(req, my_items.size(), [](void*, int n) { return my_items[n]->Name; }, &my_items, -1);
// However the code is written in a way where calling it from multiple locations is safe (e.g. to obtain buffer).
ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* ImGui::GetTypingSelectRequest(ImGuiTypingSelectFlags flags)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiTypingSelectState* data = &g.TypingSelectState;
ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* out_request = &data->Request;
// Clear buffer
const float TYPING_SELECT_RESET_TIMER = 1.80f; // FIXME: Potentially move to IO config.
const int TYPING_SELECT_SINGLE_CHAR_COUNT_FOR_LOCK = 4; // Lock single char matching when repeating same char 4 times
if (data->SearchBuffer[0] != 0)
{
bool clear_buffer = false;
clear_buffer |= (g.NavFocusScopeId != data->FocusScope);
clear_buffer |= (data->LastRequestTime + TYPING_SELECT_RESET_TIMER < g.Time);
clear_buffer |= g.NavAnyRequest;
clear_buffer |= g.ActiveId != 0 && g.NavActivateId == 0; // Allow temporary SPACE activation to not interfere
clear_buffer |= IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter);
clear_buffer |= IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Backspace) && (flags & ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_AllowBackspace) == 0;
//if (clear_buffer) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("GetTypingSelectRequest(): Clear SearchBuffer.\n"); }
if (clear_buffer)
data->Clear();
}
// Append to buffer
const int buffer_max_len = IM_ARRAYSIZE(data->SearchBuffer) - 1;
int buffer_len = (int)strlen(data->SearchBuffer);
bool select_request = false;
for (ImWchar w : g.IO.InputQueueCharacters)
{
const int w_len = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(&w, &w + 1);
if (w < 32 || (buffer_len == 0 && ImCharIsBlankW(w)) || (buffer_len + w_len > buffer_max_len)) // Ignore leading blanks
continue;
char w_buf[5];
ImTextCharToUtf8(w_buf, (unsigned int)w);
if (data->SingleCharModeLock && w_len == out_request->SingleCharSize && memcmp(w_buf, data->SearchBuffer, w_len) == 0)
{
select_request = true; // Same character: don't need to append to buffer.
continue;
}
if (data->SingleCharModeLock)
{
data->Clear(); // Different character: clear
buffer_len = 0;
}
memcpy(data->SearchBuffer + buffer_len, w_buf, w_len + 1); // Append
buffer_len += w_len;
select_request = true;
}
g.IO.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
// Handle backspace
if ((flags & ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_AllowBackspace) && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Backspace, 0, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat))
{
char* p = (char*)(void*)ImTextFindPreviousUtf8Codepoint(data->SearchBuffer, data->SearchBuffer + buffer_len);
*p = 0;
buffer_len = (int)(p - data->SearchBuffer);
}
// Return request if any
if (buffer_len == 0)
return NULL;
if (select_request)
{
data->FocusScope = g.NavFocusScopeId;
data->LastRequestFrame = g.FrameCount;
data->LastRequestTime = (float)g.Time;
}
out_request->Flags = flags;
out_request->SearchBufferLen = buffer_len;
out_request->SearchBuffer = data->SearchBuffer;
out_request->SelectRequest = (data->LastRequestFrame == g.FrameCount);
out_request->SingleCharMode = false;
out_request->SingleCharSize = 0;
// Calculate if buffer contains the same character repeated.
// - This can be used to implement a special search mode on first character.
// - Performed on UTF-8 codepoint for correctness.
// - SingleCharMode is always set for first input character, because it usually leads to a "next".
if (flags & ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_AllowSingleCharMode)
{
const char* buf_begin = out_request->SearchBuffer;
const char* buf_end = out_request->SearchBuffer + out_request->SearchBufferLen;
const int c0_len = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(buf_begin, buf_end);
const char* p = buf_begin + c0_len;
for (; p < buf_end; p += c0_len)
if (memcmp(buf_begin, p, (size_t)c0_len) != 0)
break;
const int single_char_count = (p == buf_end) ? (out_request->SearchBufferLen / c0_len) : 0;
out_request->SingleCharMode = (single_char_count > 0 || data->SingleCharModeLock);
out_request->SingleCharSize = (ImS8)c0_len;
data->SingleCharModeLock |= (single_char_count >= TYPING_SELECT_SINGLE_CHAR_COUNT_FOR_LOCK); // From now on we stop search matching to lock to single char mode.
}
return out_request;
}
static int ImStrimatchlen(const char* s1, const char* s1_end, const char* s2)
{
int match_len = 0;
while (s1 < s1_end && ImToUpper(*s1++) == ImToUpper(*s2++))
match_len++;
return match_len;
}
// Default handler for finding a result for typing-select. You may implement your own.
// You might want to display a tooltip to visualize the current request SearchBuffer
// When SingleCharMode is set:
// - it is better to NOT display a tooltip of other on-screen display indicator.
// - the index of the currently focused item is required.
// if your SetNextItemSelectionData() values are indices, you can obtain it from ImGuiMultiSelectIO::NavIdItem, otherwise from g.NavLastValidSelectionUserData.
int ImGui::TypingSelectFindMatch(ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* req, int items_count, const char* (*get_item_name_func)(void*, int), void* user_data, int nav_item_idx)
{
if (req == NULL || req->SelectRequest == false) // Support NULL parameter so both calls can be done from same spot.
return -1;
int idx = -1;
if (req->SingleCharMode && (req->Flags & ImGuiTypingSelectFlags_AllowSingleCharMode))
idx = TypingSelectFindNextSingleCharMatch(req, items_count, get_item_name_func, user_data, nav_item_idx);
else
idx = TypingSelectFindBestLeadingMatch(req, items_count, get_item_name_func, user_data);
if (idx != -1)
NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
return idx;
}
// Special handling when a single character is repeated: perform search on a single letter and goes to next.
int ImGui::TypingSelectFindNextSingleCharMatch(ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* req, int items_count, const char* (*get_item_name_func)(void*, int), void* user_data, int nav_item_idx)
{
// FIXME: Assume selection user data is index. Would be extremely practical.
//if (nav_item_idx == -1)
// nav_item_idx = (int)g.NavLastValidSelectionUserData;
int first_match_idx = -1;
bool return_next_match = false;
for (int idx = 0; idx < items_count; idx++)
{
const char* item_name = get_item_name_func(user_data, idx);
if (ImStrimatchlen(req->SearchBuffer, req->SearchBuffer + req->SingleCharSize, item_name) < req->SingleCharSize)
continue;
if (return_next_match) // Return next matching item after current item.
return idx;
if (first_match_idx == -1 && nav_item_idx == -1) // Return first match immediately if we don't have a nav_item_idx value.
return idx;
if (first_match_idx == -1) // Record first match for wrapping.
first_match_idx = idx;
if (nav_item_idx == idx) // Record that we encountering nav_item so we can return next match.
return_next_match = true;
}
return first_match_idx; // First result
}
int ImGui::TypingSelectFindBestLeadingMatch(ImGuiTypingSelectRequest* req, int items_count, const char* (*get_item_name_func)(void*, int), void* user_data)
{
int longest_match_idx = -1;
int longest_match_len = 0;
for (int idx = 0; idx < items_count; idx++)
{
const char* item_name = get_item_name_func(user_data, idx);
const int match_len = ImStrimatchlen(req->SearchBuffer, req->SearchBuffer + req->SearchBufferLen, item_name);
if (match_len <= longest_match_len)
continue;
longest_match_idx = idx;
longest_match_len = match_len;
if (match_len == req->SearchBufferLen)
break;
}
return longest_match_idx;
}
void ImGui::DebugNodeTypingSelectState(ImGuiTypingSelectState* data)
{
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
Text("SearchBuffer = \"%s\"", data->SearchBuffer);
Text("SingleCharMode = %d, Size = %d, Lock = %d", data->Request.SingleCharMode, data->Request.SingleCharSize, data->SingleCharModeLock);
Text("LastRequest = time: %.2f, frame: %d", data->LastRequestTime, data->LastRequestFrame);
#else
IM_UNUSED(data);
#endif
}
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Multi-Select support
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
void ImGui::SetNextItemSelectionUserData(ImGuiSelectionUserData selection_user_data)
{
// Note that flags will be cleared by ItemAdd(), so it's only useful for Navigation code!
// This designed so widgets can also cheaply set this before calling ItemAdd(), so we are not tied to MultiSelect api.
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
g.NextItemData.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_HasSelectionUserData;
g.NextItemData.SelectionUserData = selection_user_data;
}
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -6612,6 +6865,7 @@ bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags
// - ListBox()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// This is essentially a thin wrapper to using BeginChild/EndChild with the ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle flag for stylistic changes + displaying a label.
// Tip: To have a list filling the entire window width, use size.x = -FLT_MIN and pass an non-visible label e.g. "##empty"
// Tip: If your vertical size is calculated from an item count (e.g. 10 * item_height) consider adding a fractional part to facilitate seeing scrolling boundaries (e.g. 10.25 * item_height).
bool ImGui::BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
@ -6627,7 +6881,7 @@ bool ImGui::BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
// Size default to hold ~7.25 items.
// Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
ImVec2 size = ImFloor(CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.25f + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
ImVec2 size = ImTrunc(CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.25f + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
ImVec2 frame_size = ImVec2(size.x, ImMax(size.y, label_size.y));
ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
@ -6637,10 +6891,11 @@ bool ImGui::BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
ItemAdd(bb, 0, &frame_bb);
g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
return false;
}
// FIXME-OPT: We could omit the BeginGroup() if label_size.x but would need to omit the EndGroup() as well.
// FIXME-OPT: We could omit the BeginGroup() if label_size.x == 0.0f but would need to omit the EndGroup() as well.
BeginGroup();
if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
{
@ -6649,7 +6904,7 @@ bool ImGui::BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, label_pos + label_size);
}
BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize());
BeginChild(id, frame_bb.GetSize(), ImGuiChildFlags_FrameStyle);
return true;
}
@ -6660,7 +6915,7 @@ void ImGui::EndListBox()
IM_ASSERT((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && "Mismatched BeginListBox/EndListBox calls. Did you test the return value of BeginListBox?");
IM_UNUSED(window);
EndChildFrame();
EndChild();
EndGroup(); // This is only required to be able to do IsItemXXX query on the whole ListBox including label
}
@ -6672,7 +6927,7 @@ bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const item
// This is merely a helper around BeginListBox(), EndListBox().
// Considering using those directly to submit custom data or store selection differently.
bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items)
bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* (*getter)(void* user_data, int idx), void* user_data, int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
@ -6680,7 +6935,7 @@ bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(v
if (height_in_items < 0)
height_in_items = ImMin(items_count, 7);
float height_in_items_f = height_in_items + 0.25f;
ImVec2 size(0.0f, ImFloor(GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
ImVec2 size(0.0f, ImTrunc(GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
if (!BeginListBox(label, size))
return false;
@ -6693,8 +6948,8 @@ bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(v
while (clipper.Step())
for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
{
const char* item_text;
if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
const char* item_text = getter(user_data, i);
if (item_text == NULL)
item_text = "*Unknown item*";
PushID(i);
@ -7041,12 +7296,18 @@ void ImGui::EndMenuBar()
PopClipRect();
PopID();
window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x; // Save horizontal position so next append can reuse it. This is kinda equivalent to a per-layer CursorPos.
g.GroupStack.back().EmitItem = false;
EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0
// FIXME: Extremely confusing, cleanup by (a) working on WorkRect stack system (b) not using a Group confusingly here.
ImGuiGroupData& group_data = g.GroupStack.back();
group_data.EmitItem = false;
ImVec2 restore_cursor_max_pos = group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos;
window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x - window->Scroll.x); // Convert ideal extents for scrolling layer equivalent.
EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0 // FIXME: Misleading to use a group for that backup/restore
window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
window->DC.CursorMaxPos = restore_cursor_max_pos;
}
// Important: calling order matters!
@ -7206,15 +7467,15 @@ bool ImGui::BeginMenuEx(const char* label, const char* icon, bool enabled)
// Menu inside an horizontal menu bar
// Selectable extend their highlight by half ItemSpacing in each direction.
// For ChildMenu, the popup position will be overwritten by the call to FindBestWindowPosForPopup() in Begin()
popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - 1.0f - IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f), pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight());
window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - 1.0f - IM_TRUNC(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f), pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight());
window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_TRUNC(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
float w = label_size.x;
ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
pressed = Selectable("", menu_is_open, selectable_flags, ImVec2(w, label_size.y));
RenderText(text_pos, label);
PopStyleVar();
window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_TRUNC(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
}
else
{
@ -7223,7 +7484,7 @@ bool ImGui::BeginMenuEx(const char* label, const char* icon, bool enabled)
// Only when they are other items sticking out we're going to add spacing, yet only register minimum width into the layout system.
popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - style.WindowPadding.y);
float icon_w = (icon && icon[0]) ? CalcTextSize(icon, NULL).x : 0.0f;
float checkmark_w = IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f);
float checkmark_w = IM_TRUNC(g.FontSize * 1.20f);
float min_w = window->DC.MenuColumns.DeclColumns(icon_w, label_size.x, 0.0f, checkmark_w); // Feedback to next frame
float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - min_w);
ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
@ -7270,7 +7531,7 @@ bool ImGui::BeginMenuEx(const char* label, const char* icon, bool enabled)
// The 'HovereWindow == window' check creates an inconsistency (e.g. moving away from menu slowly tends to hit same window, whereas moving away fast does not)
// But we also need to not close the top-menu menu when moving over void. Perhaps we should extend the triangle check to a larger polygon.
// (Remember to test this on BeginPopup("A")->BeginMenu("B") sequence which behaves slightly differently as B isn't a Child of A and hovering isn't shared.)
if (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && !moving_toward_child_menu && !g.NavDisableMouseHover)
if (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && !moving_toward_child_menu && !g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.ActiveId == 0)
want_close = true;
// Open
@ -7400,14 +7661,14 @@ bool ImGui::MenuItemEx(const char* label, const char* icon, const char* shortcut
// Mimic the exact layout spacing of BeginMenu() to allow MenuItem() inside a menu bar, which is a little misleading but may be useful
// Note that in this situation: we don't render the shortcut, we render a highlight instead of the selected tick mark.
float w = label_size.x;
window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_TRUNC(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
pressed = Selectable("", selected, selectable_flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
PopStyleVar();
if (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible)
RenderText(text_pos, label);
window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_TRUNC(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
}
else
{
@ -7416,7 +7677,7 @@ bool ImGui::MenuItemEx(const char* label, const char* icon, const char* shortcut
// Only when they are other items sticking out we're going to add spacing, yet only register minimum width into the layout system.
float icon_w = (icon && icon[0]) ? CalcTextSize(icon, NULL).x : 0.0f;
float shortcut_w = (shortcut && shortcut[0]) ? CalcTextSize(shortcut, NULL).x : 0.0f;
float checkmark_w = IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f);
float checkmark_w = IM_TRUNC(g.FontSize * 1.20f);
float min_w = window->DC.MenuColumns.DeclColumns(icon_w, label_size.x, shortcut_w, checkmark_w); // Feedback for next frame
float stretch_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - min_w);
pressed = Selectable("", false, selectable_flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth, ImVec2(min_w, label_size.y));
@ -7563,16 +7824,19 @@ bool ImGui::BeginTabBar(const char* str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.TabBars.GetOrAddByKey(id);
ImRect tab_bar_bb = ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->WorkRect.Max.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
tab_bar->ID = id;
return BeginTabBarEx(tab_bar, tab_bar_bb, flags | ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused, NULL);
tab_bar->SeparatorMinX = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - IM_TRUNC(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
tab_bar->SeparatorMaxX = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x + IM_TRUNC(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
return BeginTabBarEx(tab_bar, tab_bar_bb, flags | ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused);
}
bool ImGui::BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& tab_bar_bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags, ImGuiDockNode* dock_node)
bool ImGui::BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& tab_bar_bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
if (window->SkipItems)
return false;
IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ID != 0);
if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
PushOverrideID(tab_bar->ID);
@ -7616,19 +7880,12 @@ bool ImGui::BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& tab_bar_bb, ImG
window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->ItemSpacingY);
// Draw separator
// (it would be misleading to draw this in EndTabBar() suggesting that it may be drawn over tabs, as tab bar are appendable)
const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive);
const float y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y - 1.0f;
if (dock_node != NULL)
if (g.Style.TabBarBorderSize > 0.0f)
{
const float separator_min_x = dock_node->Pos.x + window->WindowBorderSize;
const float separator_max_x = dock_node->Pos.x + dock_node->Size.x - window->WindowBorderSize;
window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f);
}
else
{
const float separator_min_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
const float separator_max_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x + IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f);
const float y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y;
window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(tab_bar->SeparatorMinX, y - g.Style.TabBarBorderSize), ImVec2(tab_bar->SeparatorMaxX, y), col);
}
return true;
}
@ -7835,7 +8092,7 @@ static void ImGui::TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
for (int tab_n = shrink_data_offset; tab_n < shrink_data_offset + shrink_data_count; tab_n++)
{
ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Index];
float shrinked_width = IM_FLOOR(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Width);
float shrinked_width = IM_TRUNC(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Width);
if (shrinked_width < 0.0f)
continue;
@ -8466,7 +8723,7 @@ bool ImGui::TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open,
const bool is_central_section = (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) == 0;
size.x = tab->Width;
if (is_central_section)
window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(IM_FLOOR(tab->Offset - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim), 0.0f);
window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(IM_TRUNC(tab->Offset - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim), 0.0f);
else
window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(tab->Offset, 0.0f);
ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
@ -8534,7 +8791,8 @@ bool ImGui::TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open,
}
// Extract a Dockable window out of it's tab bar
if (docked_window != NULL && !(docked_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
const bool can_undock = docked_window != NULL && !(docked_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove) && !(node->MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoUndocking);
if (can_undock)
{
// We use a variable threshold to distinguish dragging tabs within a tab bar and extracting them out of the tab bar
bool undocking_tab = (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id);
@ -8571,7 +8829,7 @@ bool ImGui::TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open,
if (hovered && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > TOOLTIP_DELAY && bb.GetWidth() < tab->ContentWidth)
{
// Enlarge tab display when hovering
bb.Max.x = bb.Min.x + IM_FLOOR(ImLerp(bb.GetWidth(), tab->ContentWidth, ImSaturate((g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer - 0.40f) * 6.0f)));
bb.Max.x = bb.Min.x + IM_TRUNC(ImLerp(bb.GetWidth(), tab->ContentWidth, ImSaturate((g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer - 0.40f) * 6.0f)));
display_draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window);
TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive));
}
@ -8679,7 +8937,7 @@ void ImGui::TabItemBackground(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabI
IM_ASSERT(width > 0.0f);
const float rounding = ImMax(0.0f, ImMin((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) ? g.Style.FrameRounding : g.Style.TabRounding, width * 0.5f - 1.0f));
const float y1 = bb.Min.y + 1.0f;
const float y2 = bb.Max.y + ((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Preview) ? 0.0f : -1.0f);
const float y2 = bb.Max.y - g.Style.TabBarBorderSize;
draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, y2));
draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 6, 9);
draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 9, 12);
@ -8758,7 +9016,7 @@ void ImGui::TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb,
}
else if (unsaved_marker_visible)
{
const ImRect bullet_bb(button_pos, button_pos + ImVec2(button_sz, button_sz) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
const ImRect bullet_bb(button_pos, button_pos + ImVec2(button_sz, button_sz));
RenderBullet(draw_list, bullet_bb.GetCenter(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
}

5
imgui/imstb_textedit.h
View File

@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
// This is a slightly modified version of stb_textedit.h 1.14.
// Those changes would need to be pushed into nothings/stb:
// - Fix in stb_textedit_discard_redo (see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/321)
// - Fix in stb_textedit_find_charpos to handle last line (see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/6000)
// - Fix in stb_textedit_find_charpos to handle last line (see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/6000 + #6783)
// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes.
// stb_textedit.h - v1.14 - public domain - Sean Barrett
@ -549,7 +549,10 @@ static void stb_textedit_find_charpos(StbFindState *find, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *s
i += r.num_chars;
find->y += r.baseline_y_delta;
if (i == z) // [DEAR IMGUI]
{
r.num_chars = 0; // [DEAR IMGUI]
break; // [DEAR IMGUI]
}
}
find->first_char = first = i;

34
imgui/misc/freetype/imgui_freetype.cpp
View File

@ -6,6 +6,7 @@
// CHANGELOG
// (minor and older changes stripped away, please see git history for details)
// 2023/11/13: added support for ImFontConfig::RasterizationDensity field for scaling render density without scaling metrics.
// 2023/08/01: added support for SVG fonts, enable by using '#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG' (#6591)
// 2023/01/04: fixed a packing issue which in some occurrences would prevent large amount of glyphs from being packed correctly.
// 2021/08/23: fixed crash when FT_Render_Glyph() fails to render a glyph and returns NULL.
@ -63,8 +64,10 @@
#pragma GCC diagnostic push
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // warning: 'xxxx' defined but not used
#ifndef __clang__
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wsubobject-linkage" // warning: 'xxxx' has a field 'xxxx' whose type uses the anonymous namespace
#endif
#endif
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Data
@ -164,6 +167,8 @@ namespace
unsigned int UserFlags; // = ImFontConfig::RasterizerFlags
FT_Int32 LoadFlags;
FT_Render_Mode RenderMode;
float RasterizationDensity;
float InvRasterizationDensity;
};
// From SDL_ttf: Handy routines for converting from fixed point
@ -206,6 +211,9 @@ namespace
if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LoadColor)
LoadFlags |= FT_LOAD_COLOR;
RasterizationDensity = cfg.RasterizerDensity;
InvRasterizationDensity = 1.0f / RasterizationDensity;
memset(&Info, 0, sizeof(Info));
SetPixelHeight((uint32_t)cfg.SizePixels);
@ -229,19 +237,19 @@ namespace
FT_Size_RequestRec req;
req.type = (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Bitmap) ? FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_NOMINAL : FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_REAL_DIM;
req.width = 0;
req.height = (uint32_t)pixel_height * 64;
req.height = (uint32_t)(pixel_height * 64 * RasterizationDensity);
req.horiResolution = 0;
req.vertResolution = 0;
FT_Request_Size(Face, &req);
// Update font info
FT_Size_Metrics metrics = Face->size->metrics;
Info.PixelHeight = (uint32_t)pixel_height;
Info.Ascender = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.ascender);
Info.Descender = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.descender);
Info.LineSpacing = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.height);
Info.LineGap = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.height - metrics.ascender + metrics.descender);
Info.MaxAdvanceWidth = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.max_advance);
Info.PixelHeight = (uint32_t)(pixel_height * InvRasterizationDensity);
Info.Ascender = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.ascender) * InvRasterizationDensity;
Info.Descender = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.descender) * InvRasterizationDensity;
Info.LineSpacing = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.height) * InvRasterizationDensity;
Info.LineGap = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.height - metrics.ascender + metrics.descender) * InvRasterizationDensity;
Info.MaxAdvanceWidth = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.max_advance) * InvRasterizationDensity;
}
const FT_Glyph_Metrics* FreeTypeFont::LoadGlyph(uint32_t codepoint)
@ -693,15 +701,15 @@ bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithFreeTypeEx(FT_Library ft_library, ImFontAtlas* atlas, u
const int ty = pack_rect.y + padding;
// Register glyph
float x0 = info.OffsetX + font_off_x;
float y0 = info.OffsetY + font_off_y;
float x1 = x0 + info.Width;
float y1 = y0 + info.Height;
float x0 = info.OffsetX * src_tmp.Font.InvRasterizationDensity + font_off_x;
float y0 = info.OffsetY * src_tmp.Font.InvRasterizationDensity + font_off_y;
float x1 = x0 + info.Width * src_tmp.Font.InvRasterizationDensity;
float y1 = y0 + info.Height * src_tmp.Font.InvRasterizationDensity;
float u0 = (tx) / (float)atlas->TexWidth;
float v0 = (ty) / (float)atlas->TexHeight;
float u1 = (tx + info.Width) / (float)atlas->TexWidth;
float v1 = (ty + info.Height) / (float)atlas->TexHeight;
dst_font->AddGlyph(&cfg, (ImWchar)src_glyph.Codepoint, x0, y0, x1, y1, u0, v0, u1, v1, info.AdvanceX);
dst_font->AddGlyph(&cfg, (ImWchar)src_glyph.Codepoint, x0, y0, x1, y1, u0, v0, u1, v1, info.AdvanceX * src_tmp.Font.InvRasterizationDensity);
ImFontGlyph* dst_glyph = &dst_font->Glyphs.back();
IM_ASSERT(dst_glyph->Codepoint == src_glyph.Codepoint);
@ -840,7 +848,7 @@ static FT_Error ImGuiLunasvgPortInit(FT_Pointer* _state)
static void ImGuiLunasvgPortFree(FT_Pointer* _state)
{
IM_DELETE(*_state);
IM_DELETE(*(LunasvgPortState**)_state);
}
static FT_Error ImGuiLunasvgPortRender(FT_GlyphSlot slot, FT_Pointer* _state)

139
profiler/src/imgui/imgui_impl_glfw.cpp
View File

@ -16,12 +16,16 @@
// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this.
// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need.
// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp.
// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs
// Learn about Dear ImGui:
// - FAQ https://dearimgui.com/faq
// - Getting Started https://dearimgui.com/getting-started
// - Documentation https://dearimgui.com/docs (same as your local docs/ folder).
// - Introduction, links and more at the top of imgui.cpp
// CHANGELOG
// (minor and older changes stripped away, please see git history for details)
// 2023-XX-XX: Platform: Added support for multiple windows via the ImGuiPlatformIO interface.
// 2023-10-05: Inputs: Added support for extra ImGuiKey values: F13 to F24 function keys.
// 2023-07-18: Inputs: Revert ignoring mouse data on GLFW_CURSOR_DISABLED as it can be used differently. User may set ImGuiConfigFLags_NoMouse if desired. (#5625, #6609)
// 2023-06-12: Accept glfwGetTime() not returning a monotonically increasing value. This seems to happens on some Windows setup when peripherals disconnect, and is likely to also happen on browser + Emscripten. (#6491)
// 2023-04-04: Inputs: Added support for io.AddMouseSourceEvent() to discriminate ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse/ImGuiMouseSource_TouchScreen/ImGuiMouseSource_Pen on Windows ONLY, using a custom WndProc hook. (#2702)
@ -159,7 +163,7 @@ struct ImGui_ImplGlfw_Data
GLFWcharfun PrevUserCallbackChar;
GLFWmonitorfun PrevUserCallbackMonitor;
#ifdef _WIN32
WNDPROC GlfwWndProc;
WNDPROC PrevWndProc;
#endif
ImGui_ImplGlfw_Data() { memset((void*)this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
@ -302,6 +306,18 @@ static ImGuiKey ImGui_ImplGlfw_KeyToImGuiKey(int key)
case GLFW_KEY_F10: return ImGuiKey_F10;
case GLFW_KEY_F11: return ImGuiKey_F11;
case GLFW_KEY_F12: return ImGuiKey_F12;
case GLFW_KEY_F13: return ImGuiKey_F13;
case GLFW_KEY_F14: return ImGuiKey_F14;
case GLFW_KEY_F15: return ImGuiKey_F15;
case GLFW_KEY_F16: return ImGuiKey_F16;
case GLFW_KEY_F17: return ImGuiKey_F17;
case GLFW_KEY_F18: return ImGuiKey_F18;
case GLFW_KEY_F19: return ImGuiKey_F19;
case GLFW_KEY_F20: return ImGuiKey_F20;
case GLFW_KEY_F21: return ImGuiKey_F21;
case GLFW_KEY_F22: return ImGuiKey_F22;
case GLFW_KEY_F23: return ImGuiKey_F23;
case GLFW_KEY_F24: return ImGuiKey_F24;
default: return ImGuiKey_None;
}
}
@ -491,48 +507,7 @@ static EM_BOOL ImGui_ImplEmscripten_WheelCallback(int, const EmscriptenWheelEven
#endif
#ifdef _WIN32
// GLFW doesn't allow to distinguish Mouse vs TouchScreen vs Pen.
// Add support for Win32 (based on imgui_impl_win32), because we rely on _TouchScreen info to trickle inputs differently.
static ImGuiMouseSource GetMouseSourceFromMessageExtraInfo()
{
LPARAM extra_info = ::GetMessageExtraInfo();
if ((extra_info & 0xFFFFFF80) == 0xFF515700)
return ImGuiMouseSource_Pen;
if ((extra_info & 0xFFFFFF80) == 0xFF515780)
return ImGuiMouseSource_TouchScreen;
return ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse;
}
static LRESULT CALLBACK ImGui_ImplGlfw_WndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
{
ImGui_ImplGlfw_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplGlfw_GetBackendData();
switch (msg)
{
case WM_MOUSEMOVE: case WM_NCMOUSEMOVE:
case WM_LBUTTONDOWN: case WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK: case WM_LBUTTONUP:
case WM_RBUTTONDOWN: case WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK: case WM_RBUTTONUP:
case WM_MBUTTONDOWN: case WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK: case WM_MBUTTONUP:
case WM_XBUTTONDOWN: case WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK: case WM_XBUTTONUP:
ImGui::GetIO().AddMouseSourceEvent(GetMouseSourceFromMessageExtraInfo());
break;
// We have submitted https://github.com/glfw/glfw/pull/1568 to allow GLFW to support "transparent inputs".
// In the meanwhile we implement custom per-platform workarounds here (FIXME-VIEWPORT: Implement same work-around for Linux/OSX!)
#if !GLFW_HAS_MOUSE_PASSTHROUGH && GLFW_HAS_WINDOW_HOVERED
case WM_NCHITTEST:
{
// Let mouse pass-through the window. This will allow the backend to call io.AddMouseViewportEvent() properly (which is OPTIONAL).
// The ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs flag is set while dragging a viewport, as want to detect the window behind the one we are dragging.
// If you cannot easily access those viewport flags from your windowing/event code: you may manually synchronize its state e.g. in
// your main loop after calling UpdatePlatformWindows(). Iterate all viewports/platform windows and pass the flag to your windowing system.
ImGuiViewport* viewport = (ImGuiViewport*)::GetPropA(hWnd, "IMGUI_VIEWPORT");
if (viewport && (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs))
return HTTRANSPARENT;
break;
}
#endif
}
return ::CallWindowProc(bd->GlfwWndProc, hWnd, msg, wParam, lParam);
}
static LRESULT CALLBACK ImGui_ImplGlfw_WndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
#endif
void ImGui_ImplGlfw_InstallCallbacks(GLFWwindow* window)
@ -669,8 +644,8 @@ static bool ImGui_ImplGlfw_Init(GLFWwindow* window, bool install_callbacks, Glfw
// Windows: register a WndProc hook so we can intercept some messages.
#ifdef _WIN32
bd->GlfwWndProc = (WNDPROC)::GetWindowLongPtr((HWND)main_viewport->PlatformHandleRaw, GWLP_WNDPROC);
IM_ASSERT(bd->GlfwWndProc != nullptr);
bd->PrevWndProc = (WNDPROC)::GetWindowLongPtr((HWND)main_viewport->PlatformHandleRaw, GWLP_WNDPROC);
IM_ASSERT(bd->PrevWndProc != nullptr);
::SetWindowLongPtr((HWND)main_viewport->PlatformHandleRaw, GWLP_WNDPROC, (LONG_PTR)ImGui_ImplGlfw_WndProc);
#endif
@ -703,15 +678,18 @@ void ImGui_ImplGlfw_Shutdown()
if (bd->InstalledCallbacks)
ImGui_ImplGlfw_RestoreCallbacks(bd->Window);
#ifdef __EMSCRIPTEN__
emscripten_set_wheel_callback(EMSCRIPTEN_EVENT_TARGET_DOCUMENT, nullptr, false, nullptr);
#endif
for (ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_n = 0; cursor_n < ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT; cursor_n++)
glfwDestroyCursor(bd->MouseCursors[cursor_n]);
// Windows: register a WndProc hook so we can intercept some messages.
// Windows: restore our WndProc hook
#ifdef _WIN32
ImGuiViewport* main_viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
::SetWindowLongPtr((HWND)main_viewport->PlatformHandleRaw, GWLP_WNDPROC, (LONG_PTR)bd->GlfwWndProc);
bd->GlfwWndProc = nullptr;
::SetWindowLongPtr((HWND)main_viewport->PlatformHandleRaw, GWLP_WNDPROC, (LONG_PTR)bd->PrevWndProc);
bd->PrevWndProc = nullptr;
#endif
io.BackendPlatformName = nullptr;
@ -958,8 +936,11 @@ struct ImGui_ImplGlfw_ViewportData
bool WindowOwned;
int IgnoreWindowPosEventFrame;
int IgnoreWindowSizeEventFrame;
#ifdef _WIN32
WNDPROC PrevWndProc;
#endif
ImGui_ImplGlfw_ViewportData() { Window = nullptr; WindowOwned = false; IgnoreWindowSizeEventFrame = IgnoreWindowPosEventFrame = -1; }
ImGui_ImplGlfw_ViewportData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); IgnoreWindowSizeEventFrame = IgnoreWindowPosEventFrame = -1; }
~ImGui_ImplGlfw_ViewportData() { IM_ASSERT(Window == nullptr); }
};
@ -1094,9 +1075,8 @@ static void ImGui_ImplGlfw_ShowWindow(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
// GLFW hack: install hook for WM_NCHITTEST message handler
#if !GLFW_HAS_MOUSE_PASSTHROUGH && GLFW_HAS_WINDOW_HOVERED && defined(_WIN32)
ImGui_ImplGlfw_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplGlfw_GetBackendData();
::SetPropA(hwnd, "IMGUI_VIEWPORT", viewport);
IM_ASSERT(bd->GlfwWndProc == (WNDPROC)::GetWindowLongPtr(hwnd, GWLP_WNDPROC));
vd->PrevWndProc = (WNDPROC)::GetWindowLongPtr(hwnd, GWLP_WNDPROC);
::SetWindowLongPtr(hwnd, GWLP_WNDPROC, (LONG_PTR)ImGui_ImplGlfw_WndProc);
#endif
@ -1284,6 +1264,59 @@ static void ImGui_ImplGlfw_ShutdownPlatformInterface()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// WndProc hook (declared here because we will need access to ImGui_ImplGlfw_ViewportData)
#ifdef _WIN32
static ImGuiMouseSource GetMouseSourceFromMessageExtraInfo()
{
LPARAM extra_info = ::GetMessageExtraInfo();
if ((extra_info & 0xFFFFFF80) == 0xFF515700)
return ImGuiMouseSource_Pen;
if ((extra_info & 0xFFFFFF80) == 0xFF515780)
return ImGuiMouseSource_TouchScreen;
return ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse;
}
static LRESULT CALLBACK ImGui_ImplGlfw_WndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
{
ImGui_ImplGlfw_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplGlfw_GetBackendData();
WNDPROC prev_wndproc = bd->PrevWndProc;
ImGuiViewport* viewport = (ImGuiViewport*)::GetPropA(hWnd, "IMGUI_VIEWPORT");
if (viewport != NULL)
if (ImGui_ImplGlfw_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplGlfw_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData)
prev_wndproc = vd->PrevWndProc;
switch (msg)
{
// GLFW doesn't allow to distinguish Mouse vs TouchScreen vs Pen.
// Add support for Win32 (based on imgui_impl_win32), because we rely on _TouchScreen info to trickle inputs differently.
case WM_MOUSEMOVE: case WM_NCMOUSEMOVE:
case WM_LBUTTONDOWN: case WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK: case WM_LBUTTONUP:
case WM_RBUTTONDOWN: case WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK: case WM_RBUTTONUP:
case WM_MBUTTONDOWN: case WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK: case WM_MBUTTONUP:
case WM_XBUTTONDOWN: case WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK: case WM_XBUTTONUP:
ImGui::GetIO().AddMouseSourceEvent(GetMouseSourceFromMessageExtraInfo());
break;
// We have submitted https://github.com/glfw/glfw/pull/1568 to allow GLFW to support "transparent inputs".
// In the meanwhile we implement custom per-platform workarounds here (FIXME-VIEWPORT: Implement same work-around for Linux/OSX!)
#if !GLFW_HAS_MOUSE_PASSTHROUGH && GLFW_HAS_WINDOW_HOVERED
case WM_NCHITTEST:
{
// Let mouse pass-through the window. This will allow the backend to call io.AddMouseViewportEvent() properly (which is OPTIONAL).
// The ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs flag is set while dragging a viewport, as want to detect the window behind the one we are dragging.
// If you cannot easily access those viewport flags from your windowing/event code: you may manually synchronize its state e.g. in
// your main loop after calling UpdatePlatformWindows(). Iterate all viewports/platform windows and pass the flag to your windowing system.
if (viewport && (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs))
return HTTRANSPARENT;
break;
}
#endif
}
return ::CallWindowProc(prev_wndproc, hWnd, msg, wParam, lParam);
}
#endif // #ifdef _WIN32
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
#if defined(__clang__)
#pragma clang diagnostic pop
#endif

7
profiler/src/imgui/imgui_impl_glfw.h
View File

@ -16,8 +16,11 @@
// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this.
// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need.
// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp.
// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs
// Learn about Dear ImGui:
// - FAQ https://dearimgui.com/faq
// - Getting Started https://dearimgui.com/getting-started
// - Documentation https://dearimgui.com/docs (same as your local docs/ folder).
// - Introduction, links and more at the top of imgui.cpp
#pragma once
#include "imgui.h" // IMGUI_IMPL_API

21
profiler/src/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp
View File

@ -15,12 +15,17 @@
// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this.
// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need.
// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp.
// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs
// Learn about Dear ImGui:
// - FAQ https://dearimgui.com/faq
// - Getting Started https://dearimgui.com/getting-started
// - Documentation https://dearimgui.com/docs (same as your local docs/ folder).
// - Introduction, links and more at the top of imgui.cpp
// CHANGELOG
// (minor and older changes stripped away, please see git history for details)
// 2023-XX-XX: Platform: Added support for multiple windows via the ImGuiPlatformIO interface.
// 2023-11-08: OpenGL: Update GL3W based imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h to load "libGL.so" instead of "libGL.so.1", accomodating for NetBSD systems having only "libGL.so.3" available. (#6983)
// 2023-10-05: OpenGL: Rename symbols in our internal loader so that LTO compilation with another copy of gl3w is possible. (#6875, #6668, #4445)
// 2023-06-20: OpenGL: Fixed erroneous use glGetIntegerv(GL_CONTEXT_PROFILE_MASK) on contexts lower than 3.2. (#6539, #6333)
// 2023-05-09: OpenGL: Support for glBindSampler() backup/restore on ES3. (#6375)
// 2023-04-18: OpenGL: Restore front and back polygon mode separately when supported by context. (#6333)
@ -468,9 +473,9 @@ static void ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_SetupRenderState(ImDrawData* draw_data, int fb_wid
GL_CALL(glEnableVertexAttribArray(bd->AttribLocationVtxPos));
GL_CALL(glEnableVertexAttribArray(bd->AttribLocationVtxUV));
GL_CALL(glEnableVertexAttribArray(bd->AttribLocationVtxColor));
GL_CALL(glVertexAttribPointer(bd->AttribLocationVtxPos, 2, GL_FLOAT, GL_FALSE, sizeof(ImDrawVert), (GLvoid*)IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawVert, pos)));
GL_CALL(glVertexAttribPointer(bd->AttribLocationVtxUV, 2, GL_FLOAT, GL_FALSE, sizeof(ImDrawVert), (GLvoid*)IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawVert, uv)));
GL_CALL(glVertexAttribPointer(bd->AttribLocationVtxColor, 4, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_TRUE, sizeof(ImDrawVert), (GLvoid*)IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawVert, col)));
GL_CALL(glVertexAttribPointer(bd->AttribLocationVtxPos, 2, GL_FLOAT, GL_FALSE, sizeof(ImDrawVert), (GLvoid*)offsetof(ImDrawVert, pos)));
GL_CALL(glVertexAttribPointer(bd->AttribLocationVtxUV, 2, GL_FLOAT, GL_FALSE, sizeof(ImDrawVert), (GLvoid*)offsetof(ImDrawVert, uv)));
GL_CALL(glVertexAttribPointer(bd->AttribLocationVtxColor, 4, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_TRUE, sizeof(ImDrawVert), (GLvoid*)offsetof(ImDrawVert, col)));
}
// OpenGL3 Render function.
@ -648,10 +653,8 @@ void ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_RenderDrawData(ImDrawData* draw_data)
// Desktop OpenGL 3.0 and OpenGL 3.1 had separate polygon draw modes for front-facing and back-facing faces of polygons
if (bd->GlVersion <= 310 || bd->GlProfileIsCompat)
{
// Yeah, not doing GL headers regen for this shit
//glPolygonMode(GL_FRONT, (GLenum)last_polygon_mode[0]);
//glPolygonMode(GL_BACK, (GLenum)last_polygon_mode[1]);
glPolygonMode(GL_FRONT, (GLenum)last_polygon_mode[0]);
glPolygonMode(GL_BACK, (GLenum)last_polygon_mode[1]);
}
else
{

7
profiler/src/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3.h
View File

@ -15,8 +15,11 @@
// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this.
// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need.
// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp.
// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs
// Learn about Dear ImGui:
// - FAQ https://dearimgui.com/faq
// - Getting Started https://dearimgui.com/getting-started
// - Documentation https://dearimgui.com/docs (same as your local docs/ folder).
// - Introduction, links and more at the top of imgui.cpp
// About GLSL version:
// The 'glsl_version' initialization parameter should be nullptr (default) or a "#version XXX" string.

15
profiler/src/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h
View File

@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
// WILL NOT BE USING OUR LOADER, AND INSTEAD EXPECT ANOTHER/YOUR LOADER TO BE AVAILABLE IN THE COMPILATION UNIT.
//
// Regenerate with:
// python gl3w_gen.py --output ../imgui/backends/imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h --ref ../imgui/backends/imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp ./extra_symbols.txt
// python3 gl3w_gen.py --output ../imgui/backends/imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h --ref ../imgui/backends/imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp ./extra_symbols.txt
//
// More info:
// https://github.com/dearimgui/gl3w_stripped
@ -154,6 +154,8 @@ typedef khronos_uint8_t GLubyte;
#define GL_ONE 1
#define GL_SRC_ALPHA 0x0302
#define GL_ONE_MINUS_SRC_ALPHA 0x0303
#define GL_FRONT 0x0404
#define GL_BACK 0x0405
#define GL_FRONT_AND_BACK 0x0408
#define GL_POLYGON_MODE 0x0B40
#define GL_CULL_FACE 0x0B44
@ -376,6 +378,8 @@ GLAPI void APIENTRY glGenVertexArrays (GLsizei n, GLuint *arrays);
typedef struct __GLsync *GLsync;
typedef khronos_uint64_t GLuint64;
typedef khronos_int64_t GLint64;
#define GL_CONTEXT_COMPATIBILITY_PROFILE_BIT 0x00000002
#define GL_CONTEXT_PROFILE_MASK 0x9126
typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDRAWELEMENTSBASEVERTEXPROC) (GLenum mode, GLsizei count, GLenum type, const void *indices, GLint basevertex);
typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETINTEGER64I_VPROC) (GLenum target, GLuint index, GLint64 *data);
#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
@ -466,7 +470,7 @@ GL3W_API int imgl3wIsSupported(int major, int minor);
GL3W_API GL3WglProc imgl3wGetProcAddress(const char *proc);
/* gl3w internal state */
union GL3WProcs {
union ImGL3WProcs {
GL3WglProc ptr[58];
struct {
PFNGLACTIVETEXTUREPROC ActiveTexture;
@ -530,7 +534,7 @@ union GL3WProcs {
} gl;
};
GL3W_API extern union GL3WProcs imgl3wProcs;
GL3W_API extern union ImGL3WProcs imgl3wProcs;
/* OpenGL functions */
#define glActiveTexture imgl3wProcs.gl.ActiveTexture
@ -663,7 +667,8 @@ static GL3WglProc (*glx_get_proc_address)(const GLubyte *);
static int open_libgl(void)
{
libgl = dlopen("libGL.so.1", RTLD_LAZY | RTLD_LOCAL);
// While most systems use libGL.so.1, NetBSD seems to use that libGL.so.3. See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/6983
libgl = dlopen("libGL.so", RTLD_LAZY | RTLD_LOCAL);
if (!libgl)
return GL3W_ERROR_LIBRARY_OPEN;
*(void **)(&glx_get_proc_address) = dlsym(libgl, "glXGetProcAddressARB");
@ -790,7 +795,7 @@ static const char *proc_names[] = {
"glViewport",
};
GL3W_API union GL3WProcs imgl3wProcs;
GL3W_API union ImGL3WProcs imgl3wProcs;
static void load_procs(GL3WGetProcAddressProc proc)
{